diff options
| author | Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org> | 2024-06-17 10:51:52 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org> | 2024-06-17 10:51:52 +0000 |
| commit | 4ad94864781f48b1a4b77f9cfb934622bf756ba1 (patch) | |
| tree | 3900955c1886e6d2570fea7125ee1f01bafe876d /upstream/archlinux/man8 | |
| parent | Adding upstream version 4.22.0. (diff) | |
| download | manpages-l10n-4ad94864781f48b1a4b77f9cfb934622bf756ba1.tar.xz manpages-l10n-4ad94864781f48b1a4b77f9cfb934622bf756ba1.zip | |
Adding upstream version 4.23.0.upstream/4.23.0
Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>
Diffstat (limited to 'upstream/archlinux/man8')
215 files changed, 2608 insertions, 2154 deletions
diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/anacron.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/anacron.8 deleted file mode 100644 index cafe6d50..00000000 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/anacron.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ -.TH ANACRON 8 2012-11-22 "cronie" "System Administration" -.SH NAME -anacron \- runs commands periodically -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B anacron \fR[\fB-s\fR] [\fB-f\fR] [\fB-n\fR] [\fB-d\fR] [\fB-q\fR] -[\fB-t anacrontab\fR] [\fB-S spooldir\fR] [\fIjob\fR] -.br -.B anacron \fR[\fB-S spooldir\fR] -u [\fB-t anacrontab\fR] \fR[\fIjob\fR] -.br -.B anacron \fR[\fB-V\fR|\fB-h\fR] -.br -.B anacron -T \fR[\fB-t anacrontab\fR] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Anacron -is used to execute commands periodically, with a frequency specified in -days. Unlike -.BR cron(8) , -it does not assume that the machine is running continuously. Hence, it -can be used on machines that are not running 24 hours a day to control -regular jobs as daily, weekly, and monthly jobs. -.PP -Anacron reads a list of jobs from the -.I /etc/anacrontab -configuration file (see -.BR anacrontab (5)). -This file contains the list of jobs that Anacron controls. Each job -entry specifies a period in days, a delay in minutes, a unique job -identifier, and a shell command. -.PP -For each job, Anacron checks whether this job has been executed in the -last -.B n -days, where -.B n -is the time period specified for that job. If a job has not been -executed in -.B n -days or more, Anacron runs the job's shell command, after waiting for the -number of minutes specified as the delay parameter. -.PP -After the command exits, Anacron records the date (excludes the hour) in -a special timestamp file for that job, so it knows when to execute that -job again. -.PP -When there are no more jobs to be run, Anacron exits. -.PP -Anacron only considers jobs whose identifier, as specified in -.BR anacrontab (5), -matches any of the -.I job -command-line arguments. The -.I job -command-line arguments can be represented by shell wildcard patterns (be -sure to protect them from your shell with adequate quoting). Specifying -no -.I job -command-line arguments is equivalent to specifying "*" (that is, all -jobs are considered by Anacron). -.PP -Unless Anacron is run with the -.B \-d -option (specified below), it forks to the background when it starts, and -any parent processes exit immediately. -.PP -Unless Anacron is run with the -.B \-s -or -.B \-n -options, it starts jobs immediately when their delay is over. The -execution of different jobs is completely independent. -.PP -If an executed job generates any output to standard output or to standard -error, the output is mailed to the user under whom Anacron is running -(usually root), or to the address specified in the -.B MAILTO -environment variable in the -.I /etc/anacrontab -file, if such exists. If the -.B LOGNAME -environment variable is set, it is used in the From: field of the mail. -.PP -Any informative messages generated by Anacron are sent to -.BR syslogd (8) -or -.BR rsyslogd (8) -under with facility set to -.B cron -and priority set to -.BR notice . -Any error messages are sent with the priority -.BR error . -.PP -"Active" jobs (i.e., jobs that Anacron already decided to run and are now -waiting for their delay to pass, and jobs that are currently being -executed by Anacron), are "locked", so that other copies of Anacron -cannot run them at the same time. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-f -Forces execution of all jobs, ignoring any timestamps. -.TP -.B \-u -Updates the timestamps of all jobs to the current date, but does not run -any. -.TP -.B \-s -Serializes execution of jobs. Anacron does not start a new job before the -previous one finished. -.TP -.B \-n -Runs jobs immediately and ignores the specified delays in the -.I /etc/anacrontab -file. This options implies -.BR -s . -.TP -.B \-d -Does not fork Anacron to the background. In this mode, Anacron will -output informational messages to standard error, as well as to syslog. -The output of any job is mailed by Anacron. -.TP -.B \-q -Suppresses any messages to standard error. Only applicable with -.BR -d . -.TP -.B -t some_anacrontab -Uses the specified anacrontab, rather than the -.I /etc/anacrontab -default one. -.TP -.B -T -Anacrontab testing. Tests the -.I /etc/anacrontab -configuration file for validity. If there is an error in the file, it is -shown on the standard output and Anacron returns the value of 1. Valid -anacrontabs return the value of 0. -.TP -.B -S spooldir -Uses the specified spooldir to store timestamps in. This option is -required for users who wish to run anacron themselves. -.TP -.B -V -Prints version information, and exits. -.TP -.B -h -Prints short usage message, and exits. -.SH SIGNALS -After receiving a -.B SIGUSR1 -signal, Anacron waits for any running jobs to finish and then exits. -This can be used to stop Anacron cleanly. -.SH NOTES -Make sure your time-zone is set correctly before Anacron is started since -the time-zone affects the date. This is usually accomplished by setting -the TZ environment variable, or by installing a -.I /usr/lib/zoneinfo/localtime -file. See -.BR tzset (3) -for more information. -.PP -Timestamp files are created in the spool directory for each job specified -in an anacrontab. These files are never removed automatically by -Anacron, and should be removed by hand if a job is no longer being -scheduled. -.SH FILES -.TP -.I /etc/anacrontab -Contains specifications of jobs. See -.BR anacrontab (5) -for a complete description. -.TP -.I /var/spool/anacron -This directory is used by Anacron for storing timestamp files. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR anacrontab (5), -.BR cron (8), -.BR tzset (3) -.PP -The Anacron -.I README -file. -.SH BUGS -Anacron never removes timestamp files. Remove unused files manually. -.PP -Anacron uses up to two file descriptors for each active job. It may run -out of descriptors if there are lots of active jobs. See -.B echo $(($(ulimit -n) / 2)) -for information how many concurrent jobs anacron may run. -.PP -Mail comments, suggestions and bug reports to -.MT shaleh@\:(debian.\:org|\:valinux.\:com) -Sean 'Shaleh' Perry -.ME . -.SH AUTHOR -Anacron was originally conceived and implemented by -.MT schwarz@\:monet.\:m.\:isar.\:de -Christian Schwarz -.ME . -.PP -The current implementation is a complete rewrite by -.MT itzur@\:actcom.\:co.\:il -Itai Tzur -.ME . -.PP -The code base was maintained by -.MT shaleh@\:(debian.\:org|\:valinux.\:com) -Sean 'Shaleh' Perry -.ME . -.PP -Since 2004, it is maintained by -.MT pasc@\:(debian.\:org|\:redellipse.\:net) -Pascal Hakim -.ME . -.PP -For Fedora, Anacron is maintained by -.MT mmaslano@redhat.\:com -Marcela Mašláňová -.ME . diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/badblocks.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/badblocks.8 index 0b0d8644..f264b720 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/badblocks.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/badblocks.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" -*- nroff -*- -.TH BADBLOCKS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH BADBLOCKS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME badblocks \- search a device for bad blocks .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/bridge.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/bridge.8 index a60964bb..bb02bd27 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/bridge.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/bridge.8 @@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ bridge \- show / manipulate bridge addresses and devices \fB\-s\fR[\fItatistics\fR] | \fB\-n\fR[\fIetns\fR] name | \fB\-b\fR[\fIatch\fR] filename | +\fB\-com\fR[\fIpressvlans\fR] | \fB\-c\fR[\fIolor\fR] | \fB\-p\fR[\fIretty\fR] | \fB\-j\fR[\fIson\fR] | @@ -188,6 +189,25 @@ bridge \- show / manipulate bridge addresses and devices .IR SRC_VNI " ]" .ti -8 +.B "bridge mdb flush" +.BI dev " DEV " +.RB "[ " port +.IR PORT " ]" +.RB "[ " vid +.IR VID " ]" +.RB "[ " src_vni +.IR SRC_VNI " ]" +.RB "[ " proto +.IR PROTO " ]" +.RB "[ " [no]permanent " ]" +.RB "[ " dst +.IR IPADDR " ]" +.RB "[ " dst_port +.IR DST_PORT " ]" +.RB "[ " vni +.IR VNI " ]" + +.ti -8 .BR "bridge vlan" " { " add " | " del " } " .B dev .I DEV @@ -327,6 +347,11 @@ If there were any errors during execution of the commands, the application return code will be non zero. .TP +.BR "\-com", " \-compressvlans" +Show compressed VLAN list. It will show continuous VLANs with the range instead +of separated VLANs. Default is off. + +.TP .BR \-c [ color ][ = { always | auto | never } Configure color output. If parameter is omitted or .BR always , @@ -1172,6 +1197,54 @@ the VLAN ID. Only relevant when the bridge is VLAN-aware. the source VNI Network Identifier. Only relevant when the VXLAN device is in external mode. +.SS bridge mdb flush - flush multicast group database entries. + +This command flushes the matching multicast group database entries. + +.TP +.BI dev " DEV" +the interface where this group address is associated. + +.TP +.BI port " PORT" +the target port for the operation. If the bridge device is specified then only +entries pointing to the bridge itself will be deleted. + +.TP +.BI vid " VID" +the VLAN ID for the operation. Match entries only with the specified VLAN ID. + +.TP +.BI src_vni " SRC_VNI" +the source VNI Network Identifier for the operation. Match entries only with +the specified source VNI. + +.TP +.BI proto " PROTO" +the routing protocol identifier for the operation. Match entries only with the +specified routing protocol. Can be a number or a string from the file +/etc/iproute2/rt_protos. + +.TP +.B [no]permanent +if specified then only permanent entries will be deleted or respectively if +"no" is prepended then only non-permanent (temp) entries will be deleted. + +.TP +.BI dst " IPADDR" +the IP address of the destination VXLAN tunnel endpoint where the multicast +receivers reside. Match entries only with the specified destination IP. + +.TP +.BI dst_port " DST_PORT" +the UDP destination port number to use to connect to the remote VXLAN tunnel +endpoint. Match entries only with the specified destination port number. + +.TP +.BI vni " VNI" +the VXLAN VNI Network Identifier to use to connect to the remote VXLAN tunnel +endpoint. Match entries only with the specified destination VNI. + .SH bridge vlan - VLAN filter list .B vlan diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-balance.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-balance.8 index c30684c6..dbf1c982 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-balance.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-balance.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-BALANCE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-BALANCE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-balance \- balance block groups on a btrfs filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ btrfs-balance \- balance block groups on a btrfs filesystem .sp The primary purpose of the balance feature is to spread block groups across all devices so they match constraints defined by the respective profiles. See -\fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP section \fI\%PROFILES\fP +\fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP section \X'tty: link #man-mkfs-profiles'\fI\%PROFILES\fP\X'tty: link' for more details. The scope of the balancing process can be further tuned by use of filters that can select the block groups to process. Balance works only on a mounted @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ or \fIraid6\fP .INDENT 7.0 .TP .B \-\-background|\-\-bg -run the balance operation asynchronously in the background, uses \fBfork(2)\fP to +run the balance operation asynchronously in the background, uses \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/fork.2.html'\fI\%fork(2)\fP\X'tty: link' to start the process that calls the kernel ioctl .UNINDENT .INDENT 7.0 @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Profile names, used in \fBprofiles\fP and \fBconvert\fP are one of: The mixed data/metadata profiles can be converted in the same way, but conversion between mixed and non\-mixed is not implemented. For the constraints of the profiles please refer to \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP section -\fI\%PROFILES\fP\&. +\X'tty: link #man-mkfs-profiles'\fI\%PROFILES\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH ENOSPC .sp The way balance operates, it usually needs to temporarily create a new block @@ -381,14 +381,12 @@ command: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Label: \(aqBTRFS\(aq uuid: 8a9d72cd\-ead3\-469d\-b371\-9c7203276265 Total devices 2 FS bytes used 77.03GiB devid 1 size 53.90GiB used 51.90GiB path /dev/sdc2 devid 2 size 53.90GiB used 51.90GiB path /dev/sde1 -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -419,15 +417,13 @@ Let\(aqs use the following real life example and start with the output: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs filesystem df /path Data, single: total=75.81GiB, used=64.44GiB System, RAID1: total=32.00MiB, used=20.00KiB Metadata, RAID1: total=15.87GiB, used=8.84GiB GlobalReserve, single: total=512.00MiB, used=0.00B -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -451,8 +447,7 @@ data and thus will be faster. A typical filter command would look like: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs balance start \-dusage=50 /path Done, had to relocate 2 out of 97 chunks @@ -461,8 +456,7 @@ Data, single: total=74.03GiB, used=64.43GiB System, RAID1: total=32.00MiB, used=20.00KiB Metadata, RAID1: total=15.87GiB, used=8.84GiB GlobalReserve, single: total=512.00MiB, used=0.00B -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -472,8 +466,7 @@ usage filter. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs balance start \-dusage=85 /path Done, had to relocate 13 out of 95 chunks @@ -482,8 +475,7 @@ Data, single: total=68.03GiB, used=64.43GiB System, RAID1: total=32.00MiB, used=20.00KiB Metadata, RAID1: total=15.87GiB, used=8.85GiB GlobalReserve, single: total=512.00MiB, used=0.00B -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -499,8 +491,7 @@ reflinks updated frequently. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs balance start \-musage=50 /path Done, had to relocate 4 out of 89 chunks @@ -509,8 +500,7 @@ Data, single: total=68.03GiB, used=64.43GiB System, RAID1: total=32.00MiB, used=20.00KiB Metadata, RAID1: total=14.87GiB, used=8.85GiB GlobalReserve, single: total=512.00MiB, used=0.00B -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -523,8 +513,7 @@ further compaction: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs balance start \-musage=70 /path Done, had to relocate 13 out of 88 chunks @@ -533,8 +522,7 @@ Data, single: total=68.03GiB, used=64.43GiB System, RAID1: total=32.00MiB, used=20.00KiB Metadata, RAID1: total=11.97GiB, used=8.83GiB GlobalReserve, single: total=512.00MiB, used=0.00B -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SS GETTING RID OF COMPLETELY UNUSED BLOCK GROUPS @@ -551,11 +539,9 @@ can be used to reclaim unused block groups to make it available. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs balance start \-dusage=0 /path -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -575,7 +561,7 @@ or a balance operation is still running, and \fB2\fP on other errors. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-check.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-check.8 index 59d0a764..89995e5d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-check.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-check.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-CHECK" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-CHECK" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-check \- check or repair a btrfs filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ This option also skips the delay and warning in the repair mode (see (removed: 6.7) .sp remove leftover items pertaining to the deprecated \fIinode cache\fP feature, -please use \fI\%btrfs rescue clear\-ino\-cache\fP +please use \X'tty: link #man-rescue-clear-ino-cache'\fI\%btrfs rescue clear\-ino\-cache\fP\X'tty: link' instead .UNINDENT .SH EXIT STATUS @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-convert.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-convert.8 index fded5087..09c56b98 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-convert.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-convert.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-CONVERT" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-CONVERT" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-convert \- convert from ext2/3/4 or reiserfs filesystem to btrfs in-place .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ ext2, ext3, ext4 \-\- original feature, always built in .IP \(bu 2 reiserfs \-\- since version 4.13, optionally built, requires libreiserfscore 3.6.27 .IP \(bu 2 -NTFS \-\- external tool \fI\%https://github.com/maharmstone/ntfs2btrfs\fP +NTFS \-\- external tool \X'tty: link https://github.com/maharmstone/ntfs2btrfs'\fI\%https://github.com/maharmstone/ntfs2btrfs\fP\X'tty: link' .UNINDENT .sp The list of supported source filesystem by a given binary is listed at the end @@ -76,6 +76,16 @@ have a supported data block size (i.e. the same that would be valid for \fBmkfs.btrfs\fP). This is typically the system page size (4KiB on x86_64 machines). .sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Always consider if a mkfs and file copy would not be a better option than +the in\-place conversion given what was said above. The conversion depends on +3rd party libraries and the other filesystems could still evolve and add new +features. Not all combinations are covered or tested. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp \fBBEFORE YOU START\fP .sp The source filesystem must be clean, e.g. no journal to replay or no repairs @@ -86,11 +96,9 @@ For ext2/3/4: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # e2fsck \-fvy /dev/sdx -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -98,11 +106,9 @@ For reiserfs: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # reiserfsck \-fy /dev/sdx -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -116,11 +122,9 @@ metadata of the original filesystem will be removed: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs subvolume delete /mnt/ext2_saved -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -134,11 +138,9 @@ filesystem. This will attempt to make file extents more contiguous. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs filesystem defrag \-v \-r \-f \-t 32M /mnt/btrfs -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -160,11 +162,9 @@ Note that balance operation takes a lot of time, please see also .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs balance start \-m /mnt/btrfs -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH OPTIONS @@ -207,18 +207,16 @@ use label from the converted filesystem A list of filesystem features enabled the at time of conversion. Not all features are supported by old kernels. To disable a feature, prefix it with \fI^\fP\&. Description of the features is in section -\fI\%FILESYSTEM FEATURES\fP of +\X'tty: link #man-mkfs-filesystem-features'\fI\%FILESYSTEM FEATURES\fP\X'tty: link' of \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP\&. .sp To see all available features that btrfs\-convert supports run: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX btrfs\-convert \-O list\-all -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .TP diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-device.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-device.8 index 5789f4fa..2041770a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-device.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-device.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-DEVICE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-DEVICE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-device \- manage devices of btrfs filesystems .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -83,11 +83,9 @@ size of the new device \fB/dev/sdb\fP is 100GiB. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs device add /dev/sdb /mnt -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -107,11 +105,9 @@ there\(aqs enough workspace for the conversion process, we can do: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs balance start \-mconvert=raid1 /mnt -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -137,11 +133,9 @@ we\(aqre going to lose 50GiB of the second device for obvious reasons. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs balance start \-dconvert=raid1 /mnt -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -158,12 +152,10 @@ fails. For example: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs device remove /dev/sda /mnt ERROR: error removing device \(aq/dev/sda\(aq: unable to go below two devices on raid1 -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -171,12 +163,10 @@ In order to remove a device, you need to convert the profile in this case: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs balance start \-mconvert=dup \-dconvert=single /mnt $ btrfs device remove /dev/sda /mnt -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH SUBCOMMAND @@ -186,9 +176,9 @@ $ btrfs device remove /dev/sda /mnt Add device(s) to the filesystem identified by \fIpath\fP\&. .sp If applicable, a whole device discard (TRIM) operation is performed prior to -adding the device. A device with existing filesystem detected by \fBblkid(8)\fP +adding the device. A device with existing filesystem detected by \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/blkid.8.html'\fI\%blkid(8)\fP\X'tty: link' will prevent device addition and has to be forced. Alternatively the filesystem -can be wiped from the device using e.g. the \fBwipefs(8)\fP tool. +can be wiped from the device using e.g. the \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/wipefs.8.html'\fI\%wipefs(8)\fP\X'tty: link' tool. .sp The operation is instant and does not affect existing data. The operation merely adds the device to the filesystem structures and creates some block groups @@ -216,7 +206,7 @@ Device removal must satisfy the profile constraints, otherwise the command fails and cannot be enforced. The filesystem must be converted to profile(s) that would allow the removal. This can for example happen when going down from 2 devices to 1 and using the RAID1 profile. See the -section \fI\%Typical use cases\fP\&. +section \X'tty: link btrfs-device//#man-device-typical-use-cases'\fI\%Typical use cases\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .sp The operation can take long as it needs to move all data from the device. .sp @@ -291,7 +281,7 @@ The command can be run repeatedly. Devices that have been already registered remain as such. Reloading the kernel module will drop this information. There\(aqs an alternative way of mounting multiple\-device filesystem without the need for prior scanning. See the mount option -\fI\%device (in btrfs\-man5)\fP\&. +\X'tty: link btrfs-man5//#mount-option-device'\fI\%device (in btrfs\-man5)\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .sp \fBOptions\fP .INDENT 7.0 @@ -338,8 +328,7 @@ filesystem: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX WARNING: cannot read detailed chunk info, per\-device usage will not be shown, run as root /dev/sdc1, ID: 1 Device size: 931.51GiB @@ -354,8 +343,7 @@ WARNING: cannot read detailed chunk info, per\-device usage will not be shown, r Metadata,single: 19.00GiB System,single: 32.00MiB Unallocated: 271.48GiB -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .INDENT 7.0 @@ -426,16 +414,14 @@ filesystem lifetime or from a scrub run. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs device stats /dev/sda3 [/dev/sda3].write_io_errs 0 [/dev/sda3].read_io_errs 0 [/dev/sda3].flush_io_errs 0 [/dev/sda3].corruption_errs 0 [/dev/sda3].generation_errs 0 -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .INDENT 0.0 @@ -473,7 +459,7 @@ exit status if any of the error counters is non\-zero. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-balance(8)\fP diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-filesystem.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-filesystem.8 index f73467d9..105784dd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-filesystem.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-filesystem.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-FILESYSTEM" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-FILESYSTEM" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-filesystem \- command group that primarily does work on the whole filesystems .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -59,15 +59,13 @@ created with: \fBmkfs.btrfs \-d single \-m single\fP .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs filesystem df /path Data, single: total=1.15TiB, used=1.13TiB System, single: total=32.00MiB, used=144.00KiB Metadata, single: total=12.00GiB, used=6.45GiB GlobalReserve, single: total=512.00MiB, used=0.00B -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .INDENT 7.0 @@ -292,7 +290,7 @@ Subvolume containing a swapfile cannot be snapshotted and blocks of an activated swapfile cannot be balanced. .sp Swapfile creation can be achieved by standalone commands too. Activation -needs to be done by command \fBswapon(8)\fP\&. See also command +needs to be done by command \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/swapon.8.html'\fI\%swapon(8)\fP\X'tty: link'\&. See also command \fBbtrfs inspect\-internal map\-swapfile\fP and the \fI\%Swapfile feature\fP description. .sp @@ -346,12 +344,21 @@ device respecting \fIdevid\fP (remember, devid 1 by default). .sp The resize command does not manipulate the size of underlying partition. If you wish to enlarge/reduce a filesystem, you must make sure you -can expand the partition before enlarging the filesystem and shrink the -partition after reducing the size of the filesystem. This can done using -\fBfdisk(8)\fP or \fBparted(8)\fP to delete the existing partition and recreate +expand the partition before enlarging the filesystem and shrink the +partition after reducing the size of the filesystem. This can be done using +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/fdisk.8.html'\fI\%fdisk(8)\fP\X'tty: link' or \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/parted.8.html'\fI\%parted(8)\fP\X'tty: link' to delete the existing partition and recreate it with the new desired size. When recreating the partition make sure to use the same starting partition offset as before. .sp +The size of the portion that the filesystem uses of an underlying device can be +determined via the \fBbtrfs filesystem show \-\-raw\fP command on the +filesystem’s mount point (where it’s given for each \fIdevid\fP after the string +\fIsize\fP or via the \fBbtrfs inspect\-internal dump\-super\fP command on the +specific device (where it’s given as the value of \fIdev_item.total_bytes\fP, which +is not to be confused with \fItotal_bytes\fP). +The value is also the address of the first byte not used by the +filesystem. +.sp Growing is usually instant as it only updates the size. However, shrinking could take a long time if there are data in the device area that\(aqs beyond the new end. Relocation of the data takes time. @@ -411,7 +418,7 @@ show sizes in TiB, or TB with \-\-si .UNINDENT .TP .B sync <path> -Force a sync of the filesystem at \fIpath\fP, similar to the \fBsync(1)\fP command. In +Force a sync of the filesystem at \fIpath\fP, similar to the \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/sync.1.html'\fI\%sync(1)\fP\X'tty: link' command. In addition, it starts cleaning of deleted subvolumes. To wait for the subvolume deletion to complete use the \fBbtrfs subvolume sync\fP command. .TP @@ -425,8 +432,7 @@ with information about space usage: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs filesystem usage /path WARNING: cannot read detailed chunk info, RAID5/6 numbers will be incorrect, run as root Overall: @@ -442,8 +448,7 @@ Overall: Metadata ratio: 1.00 Global reserve: 512.00MiB (used: 0.00B) Multiple profiles: no -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .INDENT 7.0 @@ -490,19 +495,17 @@ filesystem) .IP \(bu 2 \fIMultiple profiles\fP \-\- what block group types (data, metadata) have more than one profile (single, raid1, ...), see \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP section -\fI\%FILESYSTEMS WITH MULTIPLE PROFILES\fP\&. +\X'tty: link #man-btrfs5-filesystem-with-multiple-profiles'\fI\%FILESYSTEMS WITH MULTIPLE PROFILES\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .UNINDENT .sp And on a zoned filesystem there are two more lines in the \fIDevice\fP section: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Device zone unusable: 5.13GiB Device zone size: 256.00MiB -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .INDENT 7.0 @@ -519,8 +522,7 @@ The root user will also see stats broken down by block group types: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Data,single: Size:1.15TiB, Used:1.13TiB (98.26%) /dev/sdb 1.15TiB @@ -532,8 +534,7 @@ System,single: Size:32.00MiB, Used:144.00KiB (0.44%) Unallocated: /dev/sdb 669.99GiB -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -642,7 +643,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-subvolume(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-find-root.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-find-root.8 index 4dd6969d..e2acb8c9 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-find-root.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-find-root.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-FIND-ROOT" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-FIND-ROOT" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-find-root \- filter to find btrfs root .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-image.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-image.8 index c369ee4d..043eebfb 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-image.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-image.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-IMAGE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-IMAGE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-image \- create/restore an image of the filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-inspect-internal.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-inspect-internal.8 index 25160caf..cf45dc34 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-inspect-internal.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-inspect-internal.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-INSPECT-INTERNAL" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-INSPECT-INTERNAL" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-inspect-internal \- query various internal information .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-map-logical.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-map-logical.8 index c40866f1..4fd6e902 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-map-logical.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-map-logical.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-MAP-LOGICAL" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-MAP-LOGICAL" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-map-logical \- map btrfs logical extent to physical extent .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-property.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-property.8 index 1d7330d6..20cec319 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-property.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-property.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-PROPERTY" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-PROPERTY" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-property \- get/set/list properties for given filesystem object .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ The object can be an inode (file or directory), subvolume or the whole filesystem. .sp \fBbtrfs property\fP provides an unified and user\-friendly method to tune different -btrfs properties instead of using the traditional method like \fBchattr(1)\fP or -\fBlsattr(1)\fP\&. +btrfs properties instead of using the traditional method like \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/chattr.1.html'\fI\%chattr(1)\fP\X'tty: link' or +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/lsattr.1.html'\fI\%lsattr(1)\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SS Object types .sp A property might apply to several object types so in some cases it\(aqs necessary @@ -134,16 +134,14 @@ Set compression on a file: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ touch file1 $ btrfs prop get file1 [ empty output ] $ btrfs prop set file1 compression zstd $ btrfs prop get file1 compression=zstd -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -151,16 +149,14 @@ Make a writeable subvolume read\-only: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs subvol create subvol1 [ fill subvol1 with data ] $ btrfs prop get subvol1 ro=false $ btrfs prop set subvol1 ro true ro=true -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH EXIT STATUS @@ -170,11 +166,11 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP, -\fBlsattr(1)\fP, -\fBchattr(1)\fP +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/lsattr.1.html'\fI\%lsattr(1)\fP\X'tty: link', +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/chattr.1.html'\fI\%chattr(1)\fP\X'tty: link' .\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. . diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-qgroup.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-qgroup.8 index 71718ce5..0abd9a53 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-qgroup.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-qgroup.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-QGROUP" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-QGROUP" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-qgroup \- control the quota group of a btrfs filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -237,13 +237,11 @@ Given the following filesystem mounted at \fB/mnt/my\-vault\fP .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Label: none uuid: 60d2ab3b\-941a\-4f22\-8d1a\-315f329797b2 Total devices 1 FS bytes used 128.00KiB devid 1 size 5.00GiB used 536.00MiB path /dev/vdb -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -251,8 +249,7 @@ Enable quota and create subvolumes. Check subvolume ids. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ cd /mnt/my\-vault $ btrfs quota enable . $ btrfs subvolume create a @@ -261,8 +258,7 @@ $ btrfs subvolume list . ID 261 gen 61 top level 5 path a ID 262 gen 62 top level 5 path b -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -270,14 +266,12 @@ Create qgroup and set limit to 10MiB. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs qgroup create 1/100 . $ btrfs qgroup limit 10M 1/100 . $ btrfs qgroup assign 0/261 1/100 . $ btrfs qgroup assign 0/262 1/100 . -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -285,8 +279,7 @@ And check qgroups. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ btrfs qgroup show . qgroupid rfer excl @@ -295,8 +288,7 @@ qgroupid rfer excl 0/261 16.00KiB 16.00KiB 0/262 16.00KiB 16.00KiB 1/100 32.00KiB 32.00KiB -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH EXIT STATUS @@ -306,7 +298,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-quota(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-quota.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-quota.8 index e1181252..31ee8721 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-quota.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-quota.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-QUOTA" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-QUOTA" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-quota \- control the global quota status of a btrfs filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -123,8 +123,7 @@ of qgroups. Figure 1 shows an example qgroup tree. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX +\-\-\-+ |2/1| +\-\-\-+ @@ -142,8 +141,7 @@ qgroups |0/1| |0/2| |0/3| extents 1 2 3 4 Figure 1: Sample qgroup hierarchy -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -369,7 +367,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-qgroup(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-receive.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-receive.8 index d206b010..512c3e99 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-receive.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-receive.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-RECEIVE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-RECEIVE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-receive \- receive subvolumes from send stream .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ read the stream from \fIFILE\fP instead of stdin, .INDENT 0.0 .TP .B \-C|\-\-chroot -confine the process to \fIpath\fP using \fBchroot(1)\fP +confine the process to \fIpath\fP using \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/chroot.1.html'\fI\%chroot(1)\fP\X'tty: link' .UNINDENT .INDENT 0.0 .TP @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Default value is 1. A value of 0 means no limit. .BI \-m \ <ROOTMOUNT> the root mount point of the destination filesystem .sp -By default the mount point is searched in :\fI\%file:/proc/self\fP/mounts\(ga. +By default the mount point is searched in :\X'tty: link file:/proc/self'\fI\%file:/proc/self\fP\X'tty: link'/mounts\(ga. If \fB/proc\fP is not accessible, e.g. in a chroot environment, use this option to tell us where this filesystem is mounted. .TP @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-send(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-replace.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-replace.8 index d5bb007c..f396b3eb 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-replace.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-replace.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-REPLACE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-REPLACE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-replace \- replace devices managed by btrfs with other device .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -114,14 +114,12 @@ Given the following filesystem mounted at \fB/mnt/my\-vault\fP .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Label: \(aqMyVault\(aq uuid: ae20903e\-b72d\-49ba\-b944\-901fc6d888a1 Total devices 2 FS bytes used 1TiB devid 1 size 1TiB used 500.00GiB path /dev/sda devid 2 size 1TiB used 500.00GiB path /dev/sdb -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -130,11 +128,9 @@ In order to replace \fB/dev/sda\fP (\fIdevid 1\fP) with a bigger drive located a .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX btrfs replace start 1 /dev/sdc /mnt/my\-vault/ -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -142,11 +138,9 @@ You can monitor progress via: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX btrfs replace status /mnt/my\-vault/ -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -155,11 +149,9 @@ order to use the entire storage space of the new drive you need to run: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX btrfs filesystem resize 1:max /mnt/my\-vault/ -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH EXIT STATUS @@ -169,7 +161,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-device(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-rescue.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-rescue.8 index 441e07c0..64d2c0fb 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-rescue.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-rescue.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-RESCUE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-RESCUE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-rescue \- recover a damaged btrfs filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -76,11 +76,9 @@ size values if possible. .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX BTRFS error (device sdb): super_total_bytes 92017859088384 mismatch with fs_devices total_rw_bytes 92017859094528 -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -88,11 +86,9 @@ The mismatch may also exhibit as a kernel warning: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX WARNING: CPU: 3 PID: 439 at fs/btrfs/ctree.h:1559 btrfs_update_device+0x1c5/0x1d0 [btrfs] -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .UNINDENT @@ -159,8 +155,7 @@ backtrace: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX ? replay_one_dir_item+0xb5/0xb5 [btrfs] ? walk_log_tree+0x9c/0x19d [btrfs] ? btrfs_read_fs_root_no_radix+0x169/0x1a1 [btrfs] @@ -168,8 +163,7 @@ backtrace: ? replay_one_dir_item+0xb5/0xb5 [btrfs] ? btree_read_extent_buffer_pages+0x76/0xbc [btrfs] ? open_ctree+0xff6/0x132c [btrfs] -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -185,7 +179,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-check(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-restore.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-restore.8 index 79916614..5083bd43 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-restore.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-restore.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-RESTORE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-RESTORE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-restore \- try to restore files from a damaged filesystem image .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ dry run (only list files that would be recovered) .INDENT 0.0 .TP .BI \-\-path\-regex \ <regex> -restore only filenames matching a regular expression (\fBregex(7)\fP) +restore only filenames matching a regular expression (\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/regex.7.html'\fI\%regex(7)\fP\X'tty: link') with a mandatory format .sp \fB^/(|home(|/username(|/Desktop(|/.*))))$\fP @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-check(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-scrub.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-scrub.8 index e415fac8..6061cadf 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-scrub.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-scrub.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-SCRUB" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-SCRUB" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-scrub \- scrub btrfs filesystem, verify block checksums .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -68,19 +68,19 @@ scrub only a selected device. See \fI\%btrfs scrub start\fP for more. \fBNOTE:\fP .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 -The \fBionice(1)\fP may not be generally supported by all IO schedulers and +The \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/ionice.1.html'\fI\%ionice(1)\fP\X'tty: link' may not be generally supported by all IO schedulers and the options to \fBbtrfs scrub start\fP may not work as expected. .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp -In the past when the \fI\%CFQ IO scheduler\fP was generally used -the \fBionice(1)\fP syscalls set the priority to \fIidle\fP so the IO would not +In the past when the \X'tty: link https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Completely_fair_queueing'\fI\%CFQ IO scheduler\fP\X'tty: link' was generally used +the \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/ionice.1.html'\fI\%ionice(1)\fP\X'tty: link' syscalls set the priority to \fIidle\fP so the IO would not interfere with regular IO. Since the kernel 5.0 the CFQ is not available. .sp -The IO scheduler known to support that is \fI\%BFQ\fP, but first read the +The IO scheduler known to support that is \X'tty: link https://docs.kernel.org/block/bfq-iosched.html'\fI\%BFQ\fP\X'tty: link', but first read the documentation before using it! .sp -For other commonly used schedulers like \fI\%mq\-deadline\fP it\(aqs recommended to use +For other commonly used schedulers like \X'tty: link https://docs.kernel.org/block/blk-mq.html'\fI\%mq\-deadline\fP\X'tty: link' it\(aqs recommended to use \fIcgroup2 IO controller\fP which could be managed by e.g. \fIsystemd\fP (documented in \fBsystemd.resource\-control\fP). However, starting scrub like that is not yet completely straightforward. The IO controller must know the physical @@ -89,11 +89,9 @@ belong to the same accounting group. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C -$ systemd\-run \-p \(dqIOBandwidthReadMax=/dev/sdx 10M\(dq btrfs scrub start \-B / -.ft P -.fi +.EX +$ systemd\-run \-p \(dqIOReadBandwidthMax=/dev/sdx 10M\(dq btrfs scrub start \-B / +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -105,16 +103,14 @@ limit\fP\&. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ echo 100m > /sys/fs/btrfs/9b5fd16e\-1b64\-4f9b\-904a\-74e74c0bbadc/devinfo/1/scrub_speed_max $ btrfs scrub limit / UUID: 9b5fd16e\-1b64\-4f9b\-904a\-74e74c0bbadc Id Limit Path \-\- \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- 1 100.00MiB /dev/sdx -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH SUBCOMMAND @@ -226,14 +222,14 @@ necessary .INDENT 7.0 .TP .BI \-c \ <ioprio_class> -set IO priority class (see \fBionice(1)\fP manual page) if the IO +set IO priority class (see \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/ionice.1.html'\fI\%ionice(1)\fP\X'tty: link' manual page) if the IO scheduler configured for the device supports ionice. This is only supported by BFQ or Kyber but is \fInot\fP supported by mq\-deadline. Please read the section about -\fI\%IO limiting\fP\&. +\X'tty: link btrfs-scrub//#scrub-io-limiting'\fI\%IO limiting\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .TP .BI \-n \ <ioprio_classdata> -set IO priority classdata (see \fBionice(1)\fP manpage) +set IO priority classdata (see \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/ionice.1.html'\fI\%ionice(1)\fP\X'tty: link' manpage) .TP .B \-q (deprecated) alias for global \fI\-q\fP option @@ -286,8 +282,7 @@ A status on a filesystem without any error looks like the following: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # btrfs scrub start / # btrfs scrub status / UUID: 76fac721\-2294\-4f89\-a1af\-620cde7a1980 @@ -300,8 +295,7 @@ Total to scrub: 28.32GiB Bytes scrubbed: 13.76GiB (48.59%) Rate: 2.75GiB/s Error summary: no errors found -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -309,14 +303,12 @@ With some errors found: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Error summary: csum=72 Corrected: 2 Uncorrectable: 72 Unverified: 0 -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .INDENT 7.0 @@ -346,15 +338,13 @@ It\(aqs possible to set a per\-device limit via file \fBsysfs/fs/btrfs/FSID/devinfo/scrub_speed_max\fP\&. In that case the limit is printed on the \fIRate:\fP line if option \fI\-d\fP is specified, or without it on a single\-device filesystem. Read more about tat in -section about \fI\%scrub IO limiting\fP\&. +section about \X'tty: link btrfs-scrub//#scrub-io-limiting'\fI\%scrub IO limiting\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Rate: 989.0MiB/s (limit 1.0G/s) -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -364,11 +354,9 @@ some limits are set: .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX Rate: 36.37MiB/s (some device limits set) -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .UNINDENT @@ -390,7 +378,7 @@ scrub found uncorrectable errors .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-select-super.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-select-super.8 index cbf1079a..b81b00c4 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-select-super.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-select-super.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-SELECT-SUPER" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-SELECT-SUPER" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-select-super \- overwrite primary superblock with a backup copy .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-send.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-send.8 index 0f0ca7d8..833a9b7c 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-send.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-send.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-SEND" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-SEND" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-send \- generate a stream of changes between two subvolume snapshots .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-receive(8)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-subvolume.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-subvolume.8 index 1ac17e3e..7fc93c6e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-subvolume.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs-subvolume.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS-SUBVOLUME" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS-SUBVOLUME" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs-subvolume \- manage btrfs subvolumes .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -41,7 +41,8 @@ snapshots. A BTRFS subvolume is a part of filesystem with its own independent file/directory hierarchy and inode number namespace. Subvolumes can share file extents. A snapshot is also subvolume, but with a given initial content of the -original subvolume. A subvolume has always inode number 256. +original subvolume. A subvolume has always inode number 256 (see more in +\X'tty: link Subvolumes//#subvolume-inode-numbers'\fI\%Inode numbers (in Subvolumes)\fP\X'tty: link'). .sp \fBNOTE:\fP .INDENT 0.0 @@ -114,7 +115,7 @@ the subvolume on the filesystem that produced the stream. The use case relies on matching data on both sides. Changing the subvolume to read\-write after it has been received requires to reset the \fIreceived_uuid\fP\&. As this is a notable change and could potentially break the incremental send use case, performing -it by \fI\%btrfs property set\fP requires force if that is +it by \X'tty: link #man-property-set'\fI\%btrfs property set\fP\X'tty: link' requires force if that is really desired by user. .sp \fBNOTE:\fP @@ -190,28 +191,42 @@ the 4th column: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX 27 21 0:19 /subv1 /mnt rw,relatime \- btrfs /dev/sda rw,space_cache ^^^^^^ -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH INODE NUMBERS .sp -A proper subvolume has always inode number 256. If a subvolume is nested and -then a snapshot is taken, then the cloned directory entry representing the -subvolume becomes empty and the inode has number 2. All other files and -directories in the target snapshot preserve their original inode numbers. +A directory representing a subvolume has always inode number 256 (sometimes +also called a root of the subvolume): +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.EX +$ ls \-lis +total 0 +389111 0 drwxr\-xr\-x 1 user users 0 Jan 20 12:13 dir +389110 0 \-rw\-r\-\-r\-\- 1 user users 0 Jan 20 12:13 file + 256 0 drwxr\-xr\-x 1 user users 0 Jan 20 12:13 snap1 + 256 0 drwxr\-xr\-x 1 user users 0 Jan 20 12:13 subv1 +.EE +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +If a subvolume is nested and then a snapshot is taken, then the cloned +directory entry representing the subvolume becomes empty and the inode has +number 2. All other files and directories in the target snapshot preserve their +original inode numbers. .sp \fBNOTE:\fP .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 Inode number is not a filesystem\-wide unique identifier, some applications assume that. Please use pair \fIsubvolumeid:inodenumber\fP for that purpose. -The subvolume id can be read by \fI\%btrfs inspect\-internal rootid\fP -or by the ioctl \fI\%BTRFS_IOC_INO_LOOKUP\fP\&. +The subvolume id can be read by \X'tty: link #man-inspect-rootid'\fI\%btrfs inspect\-internal rootid\fP\X'tty: link' +or by the ioctl \X'tty: link #btrfs-ioc-ino-lookup'\fI\%BTRFS_IOC_INO_LOOKUP\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH PERFORMANCE @@ -299,7 +314,7 @@ there are more arguments to process. .sp If \fI\-\-subvolid\fP is used, \fIpath\fP must point to a btrfs filesystem. See \fI\%btrfs subvolume list\fP or -\fI\%btrfs inspect\-internal rootid\fP +\X'tty: link #man-inspect-rootid'\fI\%btrfs inspect\-internal rootid\fP\X'tty: link' how to get the subvolume id. .sp The corresponding directory is removed instantly but the data blocks are @@ -333,16 +348,6 @@ wait for transaction commit after deleting each subvolume. .B \-i|\-\-subvolid <subvolid> subvolume id to be removed instead of the <path> that should point to the filesystem with the subvolume -.UNINDENT -.INDENT 7.0 -.TP -.B \-\-delete\-qgroup -also delete the qgroup 0/subvolid if it exists -.TP -.B \-\-no\-delete\-qgroup -do not delete the 0/subvolid qgroup (default) -.UNINDENT -.INDENT 7.0 .TP .B \-v|\-\-verbose (deprecated) alias for global \fI\-v\fP option @@ -465,7 +470,7 @@ There are two ways how to specify the subvolume, by \fIid\fP or by the \fIsubvol path. The id can be obtained from \fI\%btrfs subvolume list\fP \fI\%btrfs subvolume show\fP or -\fI\%btrfs inspect\-internal rootid\fP\&. +\X'tty: link #man-inspect-rootid'\fI\%btrfs inspect\-internal rootid\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .UNINDENT .INDENT 0.0 .TP @@ -475,8 +480,7 @@ related snapshots). .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX /mnt/btrfs/subvolume Name: subvolume UUID: 5e076a14\-4e42\-254d\-ac8e\-55bebea982d1 @@ -490,8 +494,7 @@ related snapshots). Top level ID: 5 Flags: \- Snapshot(s): -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -547,11 +550,9 @@ If we want to delete a subvolume called \fIfoo\fP from a btrfs volume mounted at .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX btrfs subvolume delete /mnt/bar/foo -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .SH EXIT STATUS @@ -561,13 +562,13 @@ returned in case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs\-qgroup(8)\fP, \fI\%btrfs\-quota(8)\fP, \fI\%btrfs\-send(8)\fP, \fI\%mkfs.btrfs(8)\fP, -\fBmount(8)\fP +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/mount.8.html'\fI\%mount(8)\fP\X'tty: link' .\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. . diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs.8 index f20beee4..20c94cc2 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfs.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFS" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFS" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfs \- a toolbox to manage btrfs filesystems .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ If the command name is ambiguous, the list of conflicting options is printed. .sp \fISizes\fP, both upon input and output, can be expressed in either SI or IEC\-I -units (see \fI\%numfmt(1)\fP) +units (see \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/numfmt.1.html'\fI\%numfmt(1)\fP\X'tty: link') with the suffix \fIB\fP appended. All numbers will be formatted according to the rules of the \fIC\fP locale -(ignoring the shell locale, see \fI\%locale(7)\fP). +(ignoring the shell locale, see \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/locale.7.html'\fI\%locale(7)\fP\X'tty: link'). .sp For an overview of a given command use \fBbtrfs command \-\-help\fP or \fBbtrfs [command...] \-\-help \-\-full\fP to print all available options. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ case of failure. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfstune.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfstune.8 index 94cc266f..67c60322 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfstune.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/btrfstune.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "BTRFSTUNE" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "BTRFSTUNE" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME btrfstune \- tune various filesystem parameters .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Enable seeding on a given device. Value 1 will enable seeding, 0 will disable it. A seeding filesystem is forced to be mounted read\-only. A new device can be added to the filesystem and will capture all writes keeping the seeding device intact. See also section -\fI\%SEEDING DEVICE\fP +\X'tty: link #man-btrfs5-seeding-device'\fI\%SEEDING DEVICE\fP\X'tty: link' in \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP\&. .sp \fBWARNING:\fP @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ change operation in case it was interrupted. .BI \-U \ <UUID> Change fsid to \fIUUID\fP in all metadata blocks. .sp -The \fIUUID\fP should be a 36 bytes string in \fBprintf(3)\fP format +The \fIUUID\fP should be a 36 bytes string in \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man3/printf.3.html'\fI\%printf(3)\fP\X'tty: link' format \fB%08x\-%04x\-%04x\-%04x\-%012x\fP\&. If there is a previous unfinished fsid change, it will continue only if the \fIUUID\fP matches the unfinished one or if you use the option \fI\-u\fP\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/checkupdates.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/checkupdates.8 index 62b8f150..8bd0fbb4 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/checkupdates.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/checkupdates.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: checkupdates .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "CHECKUPDATES" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "CHECKUPDATES" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cifsdd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cifsdd.8 index d16b2040..582e2860 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cifsdd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cifsdd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: cifsdd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "CIFSDD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "CIFSDD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cron.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cron.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 1286ed56..00000000 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cron.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,285 +0,0 @@ -.\"/* Copyright 1988,1990,1993,1996 by Paul Vixie -.\" * All rights reserved -.\" */ -.\" -.\" Copyright (c) 2004 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC") -.\" Copyright (c) 1997,2000 by Internet Software Consortium, Inc. -.\" -.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any -.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above -.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. -.\" -.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES -.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF -.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR -.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES -.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN -.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT -.\" OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. -.\" -.\" Modified 2010/09/12 by Colin Dean, Durham University IT Service, -.\" to add clustering support. -.\" -.\" $Id: cron.8,v 1.8 2004/01/23 19:03:32 vixie Exp $ -.\" -.TH CRON "8" "2013-09-26" "cronie" "System Administration" -.SH NAME -crond \- daemon to execute scheduled commands -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B crond -.RB [ -c " | " -h " | " -i " | " -n " | " -p " | " -P " | " -s " | " -m \fP\fI<mail command>\fP ] -.br -.B crond -.B -x -.RB [ext,sch,proc,pars,load,misc,test,bit] -.br -.B crond -.B -V -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Cron -is started from -.I /etc/rc.d/init.d -or -.I /etc/init.d -when classical sysvinit scripts are used. In case systemd is enabled, then unit file is installed into -.I /lib/systemd/system/crond.service -and daemon is started by -.I systemctl start crond.service -command. It returns immediately, thus, there is no need to need to start it with -the '&' parameter. -.PP -.I Cron -searches -.I /var/spool/cron -for crontab files which are named after accounts in -.I /etc/passwd; -The found crontabs are loaded into the memory. -.I Cron -also searches for -.I /etc/anacrontab -and any files in the -.I /etc/cron.d -directory, which have a different format (see -.BR crontab (5)). -.I Cron -examines all stored crontabs and checks each job to see if it needs to be -run in the current minute. When executing commands, any output is mailed -to the owner of the crontab (or to the user specified in the -.I MAILTO -environment variable in the crontab, if such exists). Any job output can -also be sent to syslog by using the -.B "\-s" -option. -.PP -There are two ways how changes in crontables are checked. The first -method is checking the modtime of a file. The second method is using the -inotify support. Using of inotify is logged in the -.I /var/log/cron -log after the daemon is started. The inotify support checks for changes -in all crontables and accesses the hard disk only when a change is -detected. -.PP -When using the modtime option, -.I Cron -checks its crontables' modtimes every minute to check for any changes and -reloads the crontables which have changed. There is no need to restart -.I Cron -after some of the crontables were modified. The modtime option is also -used when inotify can not be initialized. -.PP -.I Cron -checks these files and directories: -.TP -.IR /etc/crontab -system crontab. Nowadays the file is empty by default. Originally it -was usually used to run daily, weekly, monthly jobs. By default these -jobs are now run through anacron which reads -.IR /etc/anacrontab -configuration file. See -.BR anacrontab (5) -for more details. -.TP -.IR /etc/cron.d/ -directory that contains system cronjobs stored for different users. -.TP -.IR /var/spool/cron -directory that contains user crontables created by the -.IR crontab -command. -.PP -Note that the -.BR crontab (1) -command updates the modtime of the spool directory whenever it changes a -crontab. -.PP -.SS Daylight Saving Time and other time changes -Local time changes of less than three hours, such as those caused by the -Daylight Saving Time changes, are handled in a special way. This only -applies to jobs that run at a specific time and jobs that run with a -granularity greater than one hour. Jobs that run more frequently are -scheduled normally. -.PP -If time was adjusted one hour forward, those jobs that would have run in -the interval that has been skipped will be run immediately. Conversely, -if time was adjusted backward, running the same job twice is avoided. -.PP -Time changes of more than 3 hours are considered to be corrections to the -clock or the timezone, and the new time is used immediately. -.PP -It is possible to use different time zones for crontables. See -.BR crontab (5) -for more information. -.SS PAM Access Control -.IR Cron -supports access control with PAM if the system has PAM installed. For -more information, see -.BR pam (8). -A PAM configuration file for -.IR crond -is installed in -.IR /etc/pam.d/crond . -The daemon loads the PAM environment from the pam_env module. This can -be overridden by defining specific settings in the appropriate crontab -file. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.TP -.B "\-h" -Prints a help message and exits. -.TP -.B "\-i" -Disables inotify support. -.TP -.B "\-m" -This option allows you to specify a shell command to use for sending -.I Cron -mail output instead of using -.BR sendmail (8) -This command must accept a fully formatted mail message (with headers) on -standard input and send it as a mail message to the recipients specified -in the mail headers. Specifying the string -.I "off" -(i.e., crond -m off) -will disable the sending of mail. -.TP -.B "\-n" -Tells the daemon to run in the foreground. This can be useful when -starting it out of init. With this option is needed to change pam setting. -.I /etc/pam.d/crond -must not enable -.I pam_loginuid.so -module. -.TP -.B "\-f" -the same as -n, consistent with other crond implementations. -.TP -.B "\-p" -Allows -.I Cron -to accept any user set crontables. -.TP -.B "\-P" -Don't set PATH. PATH is instead inherited from the environment. -.TP -.B "\-c" -This option enables clustering support, as described below. -.TP -.B "\-s" -This option will direct -.I Cron -to send the job output to the system log using -.BR syslog (3). -This is useful if your system does not have -.BR sendmail (8) -installed or if mail is disabled. -.TP -.B "\-x" -This option allows you to set debug flags. -.TP -.B "\-V" -Print version and exit. -.SH SIGNALS -When the -.I SIGHUP -is received, the -.I Cron -daemon will close and reopen its log file. This proves to be useful in -scripts which rotate and age log files. Naturally, this is not relevant -if -.I Cron -was built to use -.IR syslog (3). -.SH CLUSTERING SUPPORT -In this version of -.IR Cron -it is possible to use a network-mounted shared -.I /var/spool/cron -across a cluster of hosts and specify that only one of the hosts should -run the crontab jobs in this directory at any one time. This is done by -starting -.I Cron -with the -.B \-c -option, and have the -.I /var/spool/cron/.cron.hostname -file contain just one line, which represents the hostname of whichever -host in the cluster should run the jobs. If this file does not exist, or -the hostname in it does not match that returned by -.BR gethostname (2), -then all crontab files in this directory are ignored. This has no effect -on cron jobs specified in the -.I /etc/crontab -file or on files in the -.I /etc/cron.d -directory. These files are always run and considered host-specific. -.PP -Rather than editing -.I /var/spool/cron/.cron.hostname -directly, use the -.B \-n -option of -.BR crontab (1) -to specify the host. -.PP -You should ensure that all hosts in a cluster, and the file server from -which they mount the shared crontab directory, have closely synchronised -clocks, e.g., using -.BR ntpd (8), -otherwise the results will be very unpredictable. -.PP -Using cluster sharing automatically disables inotify support, because -inotify cannot be relied on with network-mounted shared file systems. -.SH CAVEATS -All -.BR crontab -files have to be regular files or symlinks to regular files, they must -not be executable or writable for anyone else but the owner. This -requirement can be overridden by using the -.B \-p -option on the crond command line. If inotify support is in use, changes -in the symlinked crontabs are not automatically noticed by the cron -daemon. The cron daemon must receive a SIGHUP signal to reload the -crontabs. This is a limitation of the inotify API. -.PP -The syslog output will be used instead of mail, when sendmail is not -installed. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR crontab (1), -.BR crontab (5), -.BR inotify (7), -.BR pam (8) -.SH AUTHOR -.MT vixie@isc.org -Paul Vixie -.ME -.br -.MT mmaslano@redhat.com -Marcela Mašláňová -.ME -.br -.MT colin@colin-dean.org -Colin Dean -.ME -.br -.MT tmraz@fedoraproject.org -Tomáš Mráz -.ME diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-lpd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-lpd.8 index 485021b2..a84c1497 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-lpd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-lpd.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cups-lpd man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2020-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -114,4 +114,4 @@ service using the corresponding control program. CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help), RFC 2569 .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2020-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-snmp.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-snmp.8 index b4dd517f..7b70e2a5 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-snmp.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cups-snmp.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" SNMP backend man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2012-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" .\" Licensed under Apache License v2.0. See the file "LICENSE" for more @@ -54,4 +54,4 @@ The CUPS SNMP backend uses the information from the Host, Printer, and Port Moni .BR lpinfo (8), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsaccept.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsaccept.8 index de70914b..c82d0fb5 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsaccept.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsaccept.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cupsaccept/reject man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -84,4 +84,4 @@ Finally, the CUPS versions may ask the user for an access password depending on .br CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsctl.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsctl.8 index 9f68a59e..411f3184 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsctl.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsctl.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cupsctl man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 2007 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -97,4 +97,4 @@ You cannot set the Listen or Port directives using \fBcupsctl\fR. .br CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd-helper.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd-helper.8 index 7d914174..ce7e1bc4 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd-helper.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd-helper.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cupsd-helper man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -88,4 +88,4 @@ Printers that do not support IPP can be supported using applications such as .BR ppdcfile (5), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd.8 index 8bbf612b..9bcfacc6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsd.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cupsd man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -124,4 +124,4 @@ in the foreground with a test configuration file called .BR systemd (8), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsenable.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsenable.8 index 31ad8d9d..00bda8f6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsenable.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsenable.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cupsenable/cupsdisable man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -95,4 +95,4 @@ This differs from the System V versions which require the root user to execute t .BR lpstat (1), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsfilter.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsfilter.8 index bd3d45ba..28b44e4f 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsfilter.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/cupsfilter.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" cupsfilter man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" .\" Licensed under Apache License v2.0. See the file "LICENSE" for more @@ -137,4 +137,4 @@ The following command will generate a PDF preview of job 42 for a printer named .BR mime.types (7), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/debugfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/debugfs.8 index 8b6a600d..67c24f31 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/debugfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/debugfs.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH DEBUGFS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH DEBUGFS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME debugfs \- ext2/ext3/ext4 file system debugger .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -268,9 +268,24 @@ number, otherwise use the .B s_mmp_block field in the superblock to locate and use the existing MMP block. .TP -.BI dx_hash " [-h hash_alg] [-s hash_seed] filename" +.BI dx_hash " [-cv] [-h hash_alg] [-s hash_seed] filename" Calculate the directory hash of .IR filename . +The +.I -c +option will casefold the filename before calculating the hash. The +.I -v +option will make the +.B dx_hash +command more verbose and print the hash algorithm and hash seed to +calculate the hash. +If a file system is open, use the hash_seed and +default hash_algorithm used by the file system, although these can be +overridden by the +.I -h +and +.I -s +options. The hash algorithm specified with .I -h may be diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/depmod.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/depmod.8 index cf06eae8..d854abb7 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/depmod.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/depmod.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: depmod .\" Author: Jon Masters <jcm@jonmasters.org> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: depmod .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "DEPMOD" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "depmod" +.TH "DEPMOD" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "depmod" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/devlink-rate.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/devlink-rate.8 index bcec3c31..f09ac4ac 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/devlink-rate.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/devlink-rate.8 @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ These parameter accept integer meaning weight or priority of a node. - set rate object parent to existing node with name \fINODE_NAME\fR or unset parent. Rate limits of the parent node applied to all it's children. Actual behaviour is details of driver's implementation. Setting parent to empty ("") -name due to the kernel logic threated as parent unset. +name due to the kernel logic treated as parent unset. .SS devlink port function rate add - create node rate object with specified parameters. Creates rate object of type node and sets parameters. Parameters same as for the diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/dumpe2fs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/dumpe2fs.8 index e1b15c0c..98fa185d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/dumpe2fs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/dumpe2fs.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH DUMPE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH DUMPE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME dumpe2fs \- dump ext2/ext3/ext4 file system information .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2freefrag.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2freefrag.8 index 510cbb32..795337c1 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2freefrag.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2freefrag.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" -*- nroff -*- -.TH E2FREEFRAG 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2FREEFRAG 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2freefrag \- report free space fragmentation information .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2fsck.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2fsck.8 index 68b867cf..f06d79dd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2fsck.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2fsck.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2FSCK 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2FSCK 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -44,8 +44,9 @@ e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system is used to check the ext2/ext3/ext4 family of file systems. For ext3 and ext4 file systems that use a journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying the -committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be -marked as clean. Hence, for file systems that use journaling, +committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be +marked as clean. +Hence, for file systems that use journaling, .B e2fsck will normally replay the journal and exit, unless its superblock indicates that further checking is required. @@ -63,12 +64,14 @@ option is specified, and .BR \-c , .BR \-l , or -.B -L +.B \-L options are .I not -specified. However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by +specified. +However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by .B e2fsck -are not valid if the file system is mounted. If +are not valid if the file system is mounted. +If .B e2fsck asks whether or not you should check a file system which is mounted, the only correct answer is ``no''. Only experts who really know what @@ -80,10 +83,10 @@ is run in interactive mode (meaning that none of .BR \-y , .BR \-n , or -.BR \-p +.B \-p are specified), the program will ask the user to fix each problem found in the -file system. A response of 'y' will fix the error; 'n' will leave the error -unfixed; and 'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing +file system. A response of \&'y' will fix the error; \&'n' will leave the error +unfixed; and \&'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing Enter will proceed with the default response, which is printed before the question mark. Pressing Control-C terminates e2fsck immediately. .SH OPTIONS @@ -113,7 +116,7 @@ program using the option to print out where the superblocks exist, supposing .B mke2fs is supplied with arguments that are consistent with the file system's layout -(e.g. blocksize, blocks per group, +(e.g.\& blocksize, blocks per group, .BR sparse_super , etc.). .IP @@ -170,7 +173,7 @@ Print debugging output (useless unless you are debugging .B \-D Optimize directories in file system. This option causes e2fsck to try to optimize all directories, either by re-indexing them if the -file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing +file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing directories for smaller directories, or for file systems using traditional linear directories. .IP @@ -204,86 +207,92 @@ Set the version of the extended attribute blocks which will require while checking the file system. The version number may be 1 or 2. The default extended attribute version format is 2. .TP -.BI journal_only +.B journal_only Only replay the journal if required, but do not perform any further checks or repairs. .TP -.BI fragcheck +.B fragcheck During pass 1, print a detailed report of any discontiguous blocks for files in the file system. .TP -.BI discard +.B discard Attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks after the full file system check (discarding blocks is useful on solid state devices and sparse -/ thin-provisioned storage). Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the +/ thin-provisioned storage). +Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the file system has been fully checked and only if it does not contain recognizable -errors. However there might be cases where +errors. +However there might be cases where .B e2fsck does not fully recognize a problem and hence in this case this option may prevent you from further manual data recovery. .TP -.BI nodiscard -Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. This option is -exactly the opposite of discard option. This is set as default. +.B nodiscard +Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. +This option is exactly the opposite of discard option. +This is set as default. .TP -.BI no_optimize_extents +.B no_optimize_extents Do not offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI optimize_extents +.B optimize_extents Offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI inode_count_fullmap +.B inode_count_fullmap Trade off using memory for speed when checking a file system with a large number of hard-linked files. The amount of memory required is proportional to the number of inodes in the file system. For large file -systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40TB file system +systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40\ TB file system with 2.8 billion inodes will consume an additional 5.7 GB memory if this optimization is enabled.) This optimization can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI no_inode_count_fullmap +.B no_inode_count_fullmap Disable the .B inode_count_fullmap optimization. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI readahead_kb +.B readahead_kb Use this many KiB of memory to pre-fetch metadata in the hopes of reducing e2fsck runtime. By default, this is set to the size of two block groups' inode -tables (typically 4MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more +tables (typically 4\ MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more than 1/50th of total physical memory, readahead is disabled. Set this to zero to disable readahead entirely. .TP -.BI bmap2extent +.B bmap2extent Convert block-mapped files to extent-mapped files. .TP -.BI fixes_only +.B fixes_only Only fix damaged metadata; do not optimize htree directories or compress -extent trees. This option is incompatible with the -D and -E bmap2extent +extent trees. This option is incompatible with the \-D and \-E bmap2extent options. .TP -.BI check_encoding +.B check_encoding Force verification of encoded filenames in case-insensitive directories. This is the default mode if the file system has the strict flag enabled. .TP -.BI unshare_blocks +.B unshare_blocks If the file system has shared blocks, with the shared blocks read-only feature enabled, then this will unshare all shared blocks and unset the read-only -feature bit. If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. +feature bit. +If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. If the file system does not have the read-only feature bit, but has shared -blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. Note when using this +blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. +Note when using this option, if there is no free space to clone blocks, there is no prompt to delete files and instead the operation will fail. .IP -Note that unshare_blocks implies the "-f" option to ensure that all passes -are run. Additionally, if "-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying -to allocate enough space to deduplicate. If this fails, the exit code will -be non-zero. +Note that unshare_blocks implies the "\-f" option to ensure that all passes +are run. +Additionally, if "\-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying +to allocate enough space to deduplicate. +If this fails, the exit code will be non-zero. .RE .TP .B \-f @@ -299,7 +308,7 @@ time trials. Set the pathname where the external-journal for this file system can be found. .TP -.BI \-k +.B \-k When combined with the .B \-c option, any existing bad blocks in the bad blocks list are preserved, @@ -318,7 +327,7 @@ of the file system. Hence, .BR badblocks (8) must be given the blocksize of the file system in order to obtain correct results. As a result, it is much simpler and safer to use the -.B -c +.B \-c option to .BR e2fsck , since it will assure that the correct parameters are passed to the @@ -391,7 +400,9 @@ options. .TP .BI \-z " undo_file" Before overwriting a file system block, write the old contents of the block to -an undo file. This undo file can be used with e2undo(8) to restore the old +an undo file. This undo file can be used with +.BR e2undo (8) +to restore the old contents of the file system should something go wrong. If the empty string is passed as the undo_file argument, the undo file will be written to a file named e2fsck-\fIdevice\fR.e2undo in the directory specified via the @@ -403,24 +414,23 @@ The exit code returned by .B e2fsck is the sum of the following conditions: .br -\ 0\ \-\ No errors -.br -\ 1\ \-\ File system errors corrected + 0 \-\ No errors .br -\ 2\ \-\ File system errors corrected, system should + 1 \-\ File system errors corrected .br -\ \ \ \ be rebooted + 2 \-\ File system errors corrected, system should .br -\ 4\ \-\ File system errors left uncorrected + \ \ be rebooted .br -\ 8\ \-\ Operational error + 4 \-\ File system errors left uncorrected .br -\ 16\ \-\ Usage or syntax error + 8 \-\ Operational error .br -\ 32\ \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request + 16 \-\ Usage or syntax error .br -\ 128\ \-\ Shared library error + 32 \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request .br + 128 \-\ Shared library error .SH SIGNALS The following signals have the following effect when sent to .BR e2fsck . @@ -454,7 +464,7 @@ the messages printed by are in English; if your system has been configured so that .BR e2fsck 's -messages have been translated into another language, please set the the +messages have been translated into another language, please set the .B LC_ALL environment variable to .B C @@ -492,7 +502,7 @@ Always include the full version string which displays when it is run, so I know which version you are running. .SH ENVIRONMENT .TP -.BI E2FSCK_CONFIG +.B E2FSCK_CONFIG Determines the location of the configuration file (see .BR e2fsck.conf (5)). .SH AUTHOR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2image.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2image.8 index 25673488..c379e330 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2image.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2image.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 2001 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2IMAGE 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2IMAGE 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2image \- Save critical ext2/ext3/ext4 file system metadata to a file diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2label.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2label.8 index 29adae7e..d946cffc 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2label.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2label.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2LABEL 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2LABEL 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2label \- Change the label on an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2mmpstatus.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2mmpstatus.8 index 47a4624e..684448d0 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2mmpstatus.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2mmpstatus.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" -*- nroff -*- .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2MMPSTATUS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2MMPSTATUS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2mmpstatus \- Check MMP status of an ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub.8 index 6923c679..f9cbcc03 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH E2SCRUB 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2SCRUB 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2scrub - check the contents of a mounted ext[234] file system .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub_all.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub_all.8 index a2b962d9..968a8fff 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub_all.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2scrub_all.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH E2SCRUB 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2SCRUB 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2scrub_all - check all mounted ext[234] file systems for errors. .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2undo.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2undo.8 index 8b90f7aa..be27b33e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2undo.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e2undo.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 2008 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2UNDO 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2UNDO 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2undo \- Replay an undo log for an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e4crypt.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e4crypt.8 index 579397f2..9ef53a71 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/e4crypt.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/e4crypt.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH E4CRYPT 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E4CRYPT 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e4crypt \- ext4 file system encryption utility .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/eventlogadm.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/eventlogadm.8 index 97349744..7a4dfe07 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/eventlogadm.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/eventlogadm.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: eventlogadm .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "EVENTLOGADM" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "EVENTLOGADM" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Filter messages from the system log into an event log: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/filefrag.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/filefrag.8 index 5cfa0523..7cf6a239 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/filefrag.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/filefrag.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" -*- nroff -*- -.TH FILEFRAG 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH FILEFRAG 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME filefrag \- report on file fragmentation .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.btrfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.btrfs.8 index 02a04994..c98ecf54 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.btrfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.btrfs.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "FSCK.BTRFS" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "FSCK.BTRFS" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME fsck.btrfs \- do nothing, successfully .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ fsck.btrfs \- do nothing, successfully .sp \fBfsck.btrfs\fP is a type of utility that should exist for any filesystem and is called during system setup when the corresponding \fB/etc/fstab\fP entries -contain non\-zero value for \fIfs_passno\fP, see \fBfstab(5)\fP for more. +contain non\-zero value for \fIfs_passno\fP, see \X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man5/fstab.5.html'\fI\%fstab(5)\fP\X'tty: link' for more. .sp Traditional filesystems need to run their respective fsck utility in case the filesystem was not unmounted cleanly and the log needs to be replayed before @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Operational error, e.g. device does not exist .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs(8)\fP, -\fBfsck(8)\fP, -\fBfstab(5)\fP +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/fsck.8.html'\fI\%fsck(8)\fP\X'tty: link', +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man5/fstab.5.html'\fI\%fstab(5)\fP\X'tty: link' .\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. . diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext2.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext2.8 index 68b867cf..f06d79dd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext2.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext2.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2FSCK 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2FSCK 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -44,8 +44,9 @@ e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system is used to check the ext2/ext3/ext4 family of file systems. For ext3 and ext4 file systems that use a journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying the -committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be -marked as clean. Hence, for file systems that use journaling, +committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be +marked as clean. +Hence, for file systems that use journaling, .B e2fsck will normally replay the journal and exit, unless its superblock indicates that further checking is required. @@ -63,12 +64,14 @@ option is specified, and .BR \-c , .BR \-l , or -.B -L +.B \-L options are .I not -specified. However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by +specified. +However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by .B e2fsck -are not valid if the file system is mounted. If +are not valid if the file system is mounted. +If .B e2fsck asks whether or not you should check a file system which is mounted, the only correct answer is ``no''. Only experts who really know what @@ -80,10 +83,10 @@ is run in interactive mode (meaning that none of .BR \-y , .BR \-n , or -.BR \-p +.B \-p are specified), the program will ask the user to fix each problem found in the -file system. A response of 'y' will fix the error; 'n' will leave the error -unfixed; and 'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing +file system. A response of \&'y' will fix the error; \&'n' will leave the error +unfixed; and \&'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing Enter will proceed with the default response, which is printed before the question mark. Pressing Control-C terminates e2fsck immediately. .SH OPTIONS @@ -113,7 +116,7 @@ program using the option to print out where the superblocks exist, supposing .B mke2fs is supplied with arguments that are consistent with the file system's layout -(e.g. blocksize, blocks per group, +(e.g.\& blocksize, blocks per group, .BR sparse_super , etc.). .IP @@ -170,7 +173,7 @@ Print debugging output (useless unless you are debugging .B \-D Optimize directories in file system. This option causes e2fsck to try to optimize all directories, either by re-indexing them if the -file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing +file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing directories for smaller directories, or for file systems using traditional linear directories. .IP @@ -204,86 +207,92 @@ Set the version of the extended attribute blocks which will require while checking the file system. The version number may be 1 or 2. The default extended attribute version format is 2. .TP -.BI journal_only +.B journal_only Only replay the journal if required, but do not perform any further checks or repairs. .TP -.BI fragcheck +.B fragcheck During pass 1, print a detailed report of any discontiguous blocks for files in the file system. .TP -.BI discard +.B discard Attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks after the full file system check (discarding blocks is useful on solid state devices and sparse -/ thin-provisioned storage). Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the +/ thin-provisioned storage). +Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the file system has been fully checked and only if it does not contain recognizable -errors. However there might be cases where +errors. +However there might be cases where .B e2fsck does not fully recognize a problem and hence in this case this option may prevent you from further manual data recovery. .TP -.BI nodiscard -Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. This option is -exactly the opposite of discard option. This is set as default. +.B nodiscard +Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. +This option is exactly the opposite of discard option. +This is set as default. .TP -.BI no_optimize_extents +.B no_optimize_extents Do not offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI optimize_extents +.B optimize_extents Offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI inode_count_fullmap +.B inode_count_fullmap Trade off using memory for speed when checking a file system with a large number of hard-linked files. The amount of memory required is proportional to the number of inodes in the file system. For large file -systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40TB file system +systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40\ TB file system with 2.8 billion inodes will consume an additional 5.7 GB memory if this optimization is enabled.) This optimization can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI no_inode_count_fullmap +.B no_inode_count_fullmap Disable the .B inode_count_fullmap optimization. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI readahead_kb +.B readahead_kb Use this many KiB of memory to pre-fetch metadata in the hopes of reducing e2fsck runtime. By default, this is set to the size of two block groups' inode -tables (typically 4MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more +tables (typically 4\ MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more than 1/50th of total physical memory, readahead is disabled. Set this to zero to disable readahead entirely. .TP -.BI bmap2extent +.B bmap2extent Convert block-mapped files to extent-mapped files. .TP -.BI fixes_only +.B fixes_only Only fix damaged metadata; do not optimize htree directories or compress -extent trees. This option is incompatible with the -D and -E bmap2extent +extent trees. This option is incompatible with the \-D and \-E bmap2extent options. .TP -.BI check_encoding +.B check_encoding Force verification of encoded filenames in case-insensitive directories. This is the default mode if the file system has the strict flag enabled. .TP -.BI unshare_blocks +.B unshare_blocks If the file system has shared blocks, with the shared blocks read-only feature enabled, then this will unshare all shared blocks and unset the read-only -feature bit. If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. +feature bit. +If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. If the file system does not have the read-only feature bit, but has shared -blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. Note when using this +blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. +Note when using this option, if there is no free space to clone blocks, there is no prompt to delete files and instead the operation will fail. .IP -Note that unshare_blocks implies the "-f" option to ensure that all passes -are run. Additionally, if "-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying -to allocate enough space to deduplicate. If this fails, the exit code will -be non-zero. +Note that unshare_blocks implies the "\-f" option to ensure that all passes +are run. +Additionally, if "\-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying +to allocate enough space to deduplicate. +If this fails, the exit code will be non-zero. .RE .TP .B \-f @@ -299,7 +308,7 @@ time trials. Set the pathname where the external-journal for this file system can be found. .TP -.BI \-k +.B \-k When combined with the .B \-c option, any existing bad blocks in the bad blocks list are preserved, @@ -318,7 +327,7 @@ of the file system. Hence, .BR badblocks (8) must be given the blocksize of the file system in order to obtain correct results. As a result, it is much simpler and safer to use the -.B -c +.B \-c option to .BR e2fsck , since it will assure that the correct parameters are passed to the @@ -391,7 +400,9 @@ options. .TP .BI \-z " undo_file" Before overwriting a file system block, write the old contents of the block to -an undo file. This undo file can be used with e2undo(8) to restore the old +an undo file. This undo file can be used with +.BR e2undo (8) +to restore the old contents of the file system should something go wrong. If the empty string is passed as the undo_file argument, the undo file will be written to a file named e2fsck-\fIdevice\fR.e2undo in the directory specified via the @@ -403,24 +414,23 @@ The exit code returned by .B e2fsck is the sum of the following conditions: .br -\ 0\ \-\ No errors -.br -\ 1\ \-\ File system errors corrected + 0 \-\ No errors .br -\ 2\ \-\ File system errors corrected, system should + 1 \-\ File system errors corrected .br -\ \ \ \ be rebooted + 2 \-\ File system errors corrected, system should .br -\ 4\ \-\ File system errors left uncorrected + \ \ be rebooted .br -\ 8\ \-\ Operational error + 4 \-\ File system errors left uncorrected .br -\ 16\ \-\ Usage or syntax error + 8 \-\ Operational error .br -\ 32\ \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request + 16 \-\ Usage or syntax error .br -\ 128\ \-\ Shared library error + 32 \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request .br + 128 \-\ Shared library error .SH SIGNALS The following signals have the following effect when sent to .BR e2fsck . @@ -454,7 +464,7 @@ the messages printed by are in English; if your system has been configured so that .BR e2fsck 's -messages have been translated into another language, please set the the +messages have been translated into another language, please set the .B LC_ALL environment variable to .B C @@ -492,7 +502,7 @@ Always include the full version string which displays when it is run, so I know which version you are running. .SH ENVIRONMENT .TP -.BI E2FSCK_CONFIG +.B E2FSCK_CONFIG Determines the location of the configuration file (see .BR e2fsck.conf (5)). .SH AUTHOR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext3.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext3.8 index 68b867cf..f06d79dd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext3.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext3.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2FSCK 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2FSCK 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -44,8 +44,9 @@ e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system is used to check the ext2/ext3/ext4 family of file systems. For ext3 and ext4 file systems that use a journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying the -committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be -marked as clean. Hence, for file systems that use journaling, +committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be +marked as clean. +Hence, for file systems that use journaling, .B e2fsck will normally replay the journal and exit, unless its superblock indicates that further checking is required. @@ -63,12 +64,14 @@ option is specified, and .BR \-c , .BR \-l , or -.B -L +.B \-L options are .I not -specified. However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by +specified. +However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by .B e2fsck -are not valid if the file system is mounted. If +are not valid if the file system is mounted. +If .B e2fsck asks whether or not you should check a file system which is mounted, the only correct answer is ``no''. Only experts who really know what @@ -80,10 +83,10 @@ is run in interactive mode (meaning that none of .BR \-y , .BR \-n , or -.BR \-p +.B \-p are specified), the program will ask the user to fix each problem found in the -file system. A response of 'y' will fix the error; 'n' will leave the error -unfixed; and 'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing +file system. A response of \&'y' will fix the error; \&'n' will leave the error +unfixed; and \&'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing Enter will proceed with the default response, which is printed before the question mark. Pressing Control-C terminates e2fsck immediately. .SH OPTIONS @@ -113,7 +116,7 @@ program using the option to print out where the superblocks exist, supposing .B mke2fs is supplied with arguments that are consistent with the file system's layout -(e.g. blocksize, blocks per group, +(e.g.\& blocksize, blocks per group, .BR sparse_super , etc.). .IP @@ -170,7 +173,7 @@ Print debugging output (useless unless you are debugging .B \-D Optimize directories in file system. This option causes e2fsck to try to optimize all directories, either by re-indexing them if the -file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing +file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing directories for smaller directories, or for file systems using traditional linear directories. .IP @@ -204,86 +207,92 @@ Set the version of the extended attribute blocks which will require while checking the file system. The version number may be 1 or 2. The default extended attribute version format is 2. .TP -.BI journal_only +.B journal_only Only replay the journal if required, but do not perform any further checks or repairs. .TP -.BI fragcheck +.B fragcheck During pass 1, print a detailed report of any discontiguous blocks for files in the file system. .TP -.BI discard +.B discard Attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks after the full file system check (discarding blocks is useful on solid state devices and sparse -/ thin-provisioned storage). Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the +/ thin-provisioned storage). +Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the file system has been fully checked and only if it does not contain recognizable -errors. However there might be cases where +errors. +However there might be cases where .B e2fsck does not fully recognize a problem and hence in this case this option may prevent you from further manual data recovery. .TP -.BI nodiscard -Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. This option is -exactly the opposite of discard option. This is set as default. +.B nodiscard +Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. +This option is exactly the opposite of discard option. +This is set as default. .TP -.BI no_optimize_extents +.B no_optimize_extents Do not offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI optimize_extents +.B optimize_extents Offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI inode_count_fullmap +.B inode_count_fullmap Trade off using memory for speed when checking a file system with a large number of hard-linked files. The amount of memory required is proportional to the number of inodes in the file system. For large file -systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40TB file system +systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40\ TB file system with 2.8 billion inodes will consume an additional 5.7 GB memory if this optimization is enabled.) This optimization can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI no_inode_count_fullmap +.B no_inode_count_fullmap Disable the .B inode_count_fullmap optimization. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI readahead_kb +.B readahead_kb Use this many KiB of memory to pre-fetch metadata in the hopes of reducing e2fsck runtime. By default, this is set to the size of two block groups' inode -tables (typically 4MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more +tables (typically 4\ MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more than 1/50th of total physical memory, readahead is disabled. Set this to zero to disable readahead entirely. .TP -.BI bmap2extent +.B bmap2extent Convert block-mapped files to extent-mapped files. .TP -.BI fixes_only +.B fixes_only Only fix damaged metadata; do not optimize htree directories or compress -extent trees. This option is incompatible with the -D and -E bmap2extent +extent trees. This option is incompatible with the \-D and \-E bmap2extent options. .TP -.BI check_encoding +.B check_encoding Force verification of encoded filenames in case-insensitive directories. This is the default mode if the file system has the strict flag enabled. .TP -.BI unshare_blocks +.B unshare_blocks If the file system has shared blocks, with the shared blocks read-only feature enabled, then this will unshare all shared blocks and unset the read-only -feature bit. If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. +feature bit. +If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. If the file system does not have the read-only feature bit, but has shared -blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. Note when using this +blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. +Note when using this option, if there is no free space to clone blocks, there is no prompt to delete files and instead the operation will fail. .IP -Note that unshare_blocks implies the "-f" option to ensure that all passes -are run. Additionally, if "-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying -to allocate enough space to deduplicate. If this fails, the exit code will -be non-zero. +Note that unshare_blocks implies the "\-f" option to ensure that all passes +are run. +Additionally, if "\-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying +to allocate enough space to deduplicate. +If this fails, the exit code will be non-zero. .RE .TP .B \-f @@ -299,7 +308,7 @@ time trials. Set the pathname where the external-journal for this file system can be found. .TP -.BI \-k +.B \-k When combined with the .B \-c option, any existing bad blocks in the bad blocks list are preserved, @@ -318,7 +327,7 @@ of the file system. Hence, .BR badblocks (8) must be given the blocksize of the file system in order to obtain correct results. As a result, it is much simpler and safer to use the -.B -c +.B \-c option to .BR e2fsck , since it will assure that the correct parameters are passed to the @@ -391,7 +400,9 @@ options. .TP .BI \-z " undo_file" Before overwriting a file system block, write the old contents of the block to -an undo file. This undo file can be used with e2undo(8) to restore the old +an undo file. This undo file can be used with +.BR e2undo (8) +to restore the old contents of the file system should something go wrong. If the empty string is passed as the undo_file argument, the undo file will be written to a file named e2fsck-\fIdevice\fR.e2undo in the directory specified via the @@ -403,24 +414,23 @@ The exit code returned by .B e2fsck is the sum of the following conditions: .br -\ 0\ \-\ No errors -.br -\ 1\ \-\ File system errors corrected + 0 \-\ No errors .br -\ 2\ \-\ File system errors corrected, system should + 1 \-\ File system errors corrected .br -\ \ \ \ be rebooted + 2 \-\ File system errors corrected, system should .br -\ 4\ \-\ File system errors left uncorrected + \ \ be rebooted .br -\ 8\ \-\ Operational error + 4 \-\ File system errors left uncorrected .br -\ 16\ \-\ Usage or syntax error + 8 \-\ Operational error .br -\ 32\ \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request + 16 \-\ Usage or syntax error .br -\ 128\ \-\ Shared library error + 32 \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request .br + 128 \-\ Shared library error .SH SIGNALS The following signals have the following effect when sent to .BR e2fsck . @@ -454,7 +464,7 @@ the messages printed by are in English; if your system has been configured so that .BR e2fsck 's -messages have been translated into another language, please set the the +messages have been translated into another language, please set the .B LC_ALL environment variable to .B C @@ -492,7 +502,7 @@ Always include the full version string which displays when it is run, so I know which version you are running. .SH ENVIRONMENT .TP -.BI E2FSCK_CONFIG +.B E2FSCK_CONFIG Determines the location of the configuration file (see .BR e2fsck.conf (5)). .SH AUTHOR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext4.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext4.8 index 68b867cf..f06d79dd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext4.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/fsck.ext4.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH E2FSCK 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH E2FSCK 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -44,8 +44,9 @@ e2fsck \- check a Linux ext2/ext3/ext4 file system is used to check the ext2/ext3/ext4 family of file systems. For ext3 and ext4 file systems that use a journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying the -committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be -marked as clean. Hence, for file systems that use journaling, +committed transactions in the journal, the file system should be +marked as clean. +Hence, for file systems that use journaling, .B e2fsck will normally replay the journal and exit, unless its superblock indicates that further checking is required. @@ -63,12 +64,14 @@ option is specified, and .BR \-c , .BR \-l , or -.B -L +.B \-L options are .I not -specified. However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by +specified. +However, even if it is safe to do so, the results printed by .B e2fsck -are not valid if the file system is mounted. If +are not valid if the file system is mounted. +If .B e2fsck asks whether or not you should check a file system which is mounted, the only correct answer is ``no''. Only experts who really know what @@ -80,10 +83,10 @@ is run in interactive mode (meaning that none of .BR \-y , .BR \-n , or -.BR \-p +.B \-p are specified), the program will ask the user to fix each problem found in the -file system. A response of 'y' will fix the error; 'n' will leave the error -unfixed; and 'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing +file system. A response of \&'y' will fix the error; \&'n' will leave the error +unfixed; and \&'a' will fix the problem and all subsequent problems; pressing Enter will proceed with the default response, which is printed before the question mark. Pressing Control-C terminates e2fsck immediately. .SH OPTIONS @@ -113,7 +116,7 @@ program using the option to print out where the superblocks exist, supposing .B mke2fs is supplied with arguments that are consistent with the file system's layout -(e.g. blocksize, blocks per group, +(e.g.\& blocksize, blocks per group, .BR sparse_super , etc.). .IP @@ -170,7 +173,7 @@ Print debugging output (useless unless you are debugging .B \-D Optimize directories in file system. This option causes e2fsck to try to optimize all directories, either by re-indexing them if the -file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing +file system supports directory indexing, or by sorting and compressing directories for smaller directories, or for file systems using traditional linear directories. .IP @@ -204,86 +207,92 @@ Set the version of the extended attribute blocks which will require while checking the file system. The version number may be 1 or 2. The default extended attribute version format is 2. .TP -.BI journal_only +.B journal_only Only replay the journal if required, but do not perform any further checks or repairs. .TP -.BI fragcheck +.B fragcheck During pass 1, print a detailed report of any discontiguous blocks for files in the file system. .TP -.BI discard +.B discard Attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks after the full file system check (discarding blocks is useful on solid state devices and sparse -/ thin-provisioned storage). Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the +/ thin-provisioned storage). +Note that discard is done in pass 5 AFTER the file system has been fully checked and only if it does not contain recognizable -errors. However there might be cases where +errors. +However there might be cases where .B e2fsck does not fully recognize a problem and hence in this case this option may prevent you from further manual data recovery. .TP -.BI nodiscard -Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. This option is -exactly the opposite of discard option. This is set as default. +.B nodiscard +Do not attempt to discard free blocks and unused inode blocks. +This option is exactly the opposite of discard option. +This is set as default. .TP -.BI no_optimize_extents +.B no_optimize_extents Do not offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI optimize_extents +.B optimize_extents Offer to optimize the extent tree by eliminating unnecessary width or depth. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI inode_count_fullmap +.B inode_count_fullmap Trade off using memory for speed when checking a file system with a large number of hard-linked files. The amount of memory required is proportional to the number of inodes in the file system. For large file -systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40TB file system +systems, this can be gigabytes of memory. (For example, a 40\ TB file system with 2.8 billion inodes will consume an additional 5.7 GB memory if this optimization is enabled.) This optimization can also be enabled in the options section of .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI no_inode_count_fullmap +.B no_inode_count_fullmap Disable the .B inode_count_fullmap optimization. This is the default unless otherwise specified in .BR /etc/e2fsck.conf . .TP -.BI readahead_kb +.B readahead_kb Use this many KiB of memory to pre-fetch metadata in the hopes of reducing e2fsck runtime. By default, this is set to the size of two block groups' inode -tables (typically 4MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more +tables (typically 4\ MiB on a regular ext4 file system); if this amount is more than 1/50th of total physical memory, readahead is disabled. Set this to zero to disable readahead entirely. .TP -.BI bmap2extent +.B bmap2extent Convert block-mapped files to extent-mapped files. .TP -.BI fixes_only +.B fixes_only Only fix damaged metadata; do not optimize htree directories or compress -extent trees. This option is incompatible with the -D and -E bmap2extent +extent trees. This option is incompatible with the \-D and \-E bmap2extent options. .TP -.BI check_encoding +.B check_encoding Force verification of encoded filenames in case-insensitive directories. This is the default mode if the file system has the strict flag enabled. .TP -.BI unshare_blocks +.B unshare_blocks If the file system has shared blocks, with the shared blocks read-only feature enabled, then this will unshare all shared blocks and unset the read-only -feature bit. If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. +feature bit. +If there is not enough free space then the operation will fail. If the file system does not have the read-only feature bit, but has shared -blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. Note when using this +blocks anyway, then this option will have no effect. +Note when using this option, if there is no free space to clone blocks, there is no prompt to delete files and instead the operation will fail. .IP -Note that unshare_blocks implies the "-f" option to ensure that all passes -are run. Additionally, if "-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying -to allocate enough space to deduplicate. If this fails, the exit code will -be non-zero. +Note that unshare_blocks implies the "\-f" option to ensure that all passes +are run. +Additionally, if "\-n" is also specified, e2fsck will simulate trying +to allocate enough space to deduplicate. +If this fails, the exit code will be non-zero. .RE .TP .B \-f @@ -299,7 +308,7 @@ time trials. Set the pathname where the external-journal for this file system can be found. .TP -.BI \-k +.B \-k When combined with the .B \-c option, any existing bad blocks in the bad blocks list are preserved, @@ -318,7 +327,7 @@ of the file system. Hence, .BR badblocks (8) must be given the blocksize of the file system in order to obtain correct results. As a result, it is much simpler and safer to use the -.B -c +.B \-c option to .BR e2fsck , since it will assure that the correct parameters are passed to the @@ -391,7 +400,9 @@ options. .TP .BI \-z " undo_file" Before overwriting a file system block, write the old contents of the block to -an undo file. This undo file can be used with e2undo(8) to restore the old +an undo file. This undo file can be used with +.BR e2undo (8) +to restore the old contents of the file system should something go wrong. If the empty string is passed as the undo_file argument, the undo file will be written to a file named e2fsck-\fIdevice\fR.e2undo in the directory specified via the @@ -403,24 +414,23 @@ The exit code returned by .B e2fsck is the sum of the following conditions: .br -\ 0\ \-\ No errors -.br -\ 1\ \-\ File system errors corrected + 0 \-\ No errors .br -\ 2\ \-\ File system errors corrected, system should + 1 \-\ File system errors corrected .br -\ \ \ \ be rebooted + 2 \-\ File system errors corrected, system should .br -\ 4\ \-\ File system errors left uncorrected + \ \ be rebooted .br -\ 8\ \-\ Operational error + 4 \-\ File system errors left uncorrected .br -\ 16\ \-\ Usage or syntax error + 8 \-\ Operational error .br -\ 32\ \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request + 16 \-\ Usage or syntax error .br -\ 128\ \-\ Shared library error + 32 \-\ E2fsck canceled by user request .br + 128 \-\ Shared library error .SH SIGNALS The following signals have the following effect when sent to .BR e2fsck . @@ -454,7 +464,7 @@ the messages printed by are in English; if your system has been configured so that .BR e2fsck 's -messages have been translated into another language, please set the the +messages have been translated into another language, please set the .B LC_ALL environment variable to .B C @@ -492,7 +502,7 @@ Always include the full version string which displays when it is run, so I know which version you are running. .SH ENVIRONMENT .TP -.BI E2FSCK_CONFIG +.B E2FSCK_CONFIG Determines the location of the configuration file (see .BR e2fsck.conf (5)). .SH AUTHOR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-bios-setup.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-bios-setup.8 index 5dfb72e1..e44a2a85 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-bios-setup.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-bios-setup.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-BIOS-SETUP "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-BIOS-SETUP "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-bios-setup \- set up a device to boot using GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-install.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-install.8 index e13ed901..1538ef17 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-install.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-install.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-INSTALL "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-INSTALL "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-install \- install GRUB to a device .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ do not probe for filesystems in DEVICE .TP \fB\-\-target\fR=\fI\,TARGET\/\fR install GRUB for TARGET platform -[default=i386\-pc]; available targets: +[default=x86_64\-efi]; available targets: arm\-coreboot, arm\-efi, arm\-uboot, arm64\-efi, i386\-coreboot, i386\-efi, i386\-ieee1275, i386\-multiboot, i386\-pc, i386\-qemu, i386\-xen, diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-macbless.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-macbless.8 index e4c0bec5..b7dac155 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-macbless.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-macbless.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-MACBLESS "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-MACBLESS "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-macbless \- bless a mac file/directory .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-mkconfig.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-mkconfig.8 index ccae746f..576439ad 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-mkconfig.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-mkconfig.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-MKCONFIG "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-MKCONFIG "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-mkconfig \- generate a GRUB configuration file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-ofpathname.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-ofpathname.8 index d3f37011..11ab4c61 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-ofpathname.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-ofpathname.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-OFPATHNAME "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-OFPATHNAME "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-ofpathname \- find OpenBOOT path for a device .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-probe.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-probe.8 index a6044a38..6e700861 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-probe.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-probe.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-PROBE "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-PROBE "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-probe \- probe device information for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-reboot.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-reboot.8 index 1384c080..4e2c12c2 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-reboot.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-reboot.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-REBOOT "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-REBOOT "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-reboot \- set the default boot entry for GRUB, for the next boot only .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-set-default.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-set-default.8 index 769a68d2..17f5f444 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-set-default.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-set-default.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-SET-DEFAULT "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-SET-DEFAULT "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-set-default \- set the saved default boot entry for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-sparc64-setup.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-sparc64-setup.8 index 83a300da..dfa3d42e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-sparc64-setup.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/grub-sparc64-setup.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.49.3. -.TH GRUB-SPARC64-SETUP "8" "December 2023" "GRUB 2:2.12-1" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-SPARC64-SETUP "8" "March 2024" "GRUB 2:2.12-2" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-sparc64-setup \- set up a device to boot using GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/iconvconfig.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/iconvconfig.8 index 51c785c3..bf26594b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/iconvconfig.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/iconvconfig.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" .\" SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-or-later .\" -.TH iconvconfig 8 2023-10-31 "Linux man-pages 6.06" +.TH iconvconfig 8 2024-05-02 "Linux man-pages 6.8" .SH NAME iconvconfig \- create iconv module configuration cache .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ad.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ad.8 index d319f474..6c8e0d9d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ad.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ad.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_ad .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_AD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_AD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -50,9 +50,11 @@ Defines the available matching UID and GID range for which the backend is author .PP schema_mode = <rfc2307 | sfu | sfu20> .RS 4 -Defines the schema that idmap_ad should use when querying Active Directory regarding user and group information\&. This can be either the RFC2307 schema support included in Windows 2003 R2 or the Service for Unix (SFU) schema\&. For SFU 3\&.0 or 3\&.5 please choose "sfu", for SFU 2\&.0 please choose "sfu20"\&. Please note that the behavior of primary group membership is controlled by the +Defines the schema that idmap_ad should use when querying Active Directory regarding user and group information\&. This can be either the RFC2307 schema support included in Windows Server 2003 R2 and newer or the Service for Unix (SFU) schema for versions before Windows Server 2003 R2\&. For SFU 3\&.0 or 3\&.5 please choose "sfu", for SFU 2\&.0 please choose "sfu20"\&. Please note that the behavior of primary group membership is controlled by the \fIunix_primary_group\fR option\&. +.sp +Default: rfc2307 .RE .PP unix_primary_group = yes/no @@ -81,6 +83,15 @@ are used\&. Default: no .RE .PP +all_groupmem = yes/no +.RS 4 +If set to +\fIyes\fR +winbind will retrieve all group members for getgrnam(3), getgrgid(3) and getgrent(3) calls, including those with missing uidNumber\&. +.sp +Default: no +.RE +.PP deny ous .RS 4 This parameter is a list of OUs from which objects will not be mapped via the ad idmap module\&. If diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_autorid.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_autorid.8 index 8d8d0beb..0cfad8fa 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_autorid.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_autorid.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_autorid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_AUTORID" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_AUTORID" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_hash.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_hash.8 index 73d43a8d..8c43d8ae 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_hash.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_hash.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_hash .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_HASH" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_HASH" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ldap.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ldap.8 index dac74f59..53d655d9 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ldap.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_ldap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_ldap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_LDAP" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_LDAP" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_nss.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_nss.8 index a05f6c9e..d6674b5a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_nss.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_nss.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_nss .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_NSS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_NSS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -32,6 +32,21 @@ idmap_nss \- Samba\*(Aqs idmap_nss Backend for Winbind .SH "DESCRIPTION" .PP The idmap_nss plugin provides a means to map Unix users and groups to Windows accounts\&. This provides a simple means of ensuring that the SID for a Unix user named jsmith is reported as the one assigned to DOMAIN\ejsmith which is necessary for reporting ACLs on files and printers stored on a Samba member server\&. +.SH "IDMAP OPTIONS" +.PP +range = low \- high +.RS 4 +Defines the available matching UID and GID range for which the backend is authoritative\&. Note that the range acts as a filter\&. Returned UIDs or GIDs by NSS modules that fall outside the range are ignored and the corresponding maps discarded\&. It is intended as a way to avoid accidental UID/GID overlaps between local and remotely defined IDs\&. +.RE +.PP +use_upn = <yes | no> +.RS 4 +Some NSS modules can return and handle UPNs and/or down\-level logon names (e\&.g\&., DOMAIN\euser or user@REALM)\&. +.sp +If this parameter is enabled the returned names from NSS will be parsed and the resulting namespace will be used as the authoritative namespace instead of the IDMAP domain name\&. Also, down\-level logon names will be sent to NSS instead of the plain username to give NSS modules a hint about the user\*(Aqs correct domain\&. +.sp +Default: no +.RE .SH "EXAMPLES" .PP This example shows how to use idmap_nss to obtain the local account ID\*(Aqs for its own domain (SAMBA) from NSS, whilst allocating new mappings for the default domain (*) and any trusted domains\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rfc2307.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rfc2307.8 index 50bea362..1fb08696 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rfc2307.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rfc2307.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_rfc2307 .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_RFC2307" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_RFC2307" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rid.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rid.8 index 154cd8ce..6fc408ed 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rid.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_rid.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_rid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_RID" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_RID" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_script.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_script.8 index ef161a5b..e76adb95 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_script.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_script.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_script .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_SCRIPT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_SCRIPT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb.8 index 75e424c3..1ac35731 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_TDB" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_TDB" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb2.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb2.8 index f92d7f66..46224b85 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb2.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/idmap_tdb2.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: idmap_tdb2 .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "IDMAP_TDB2" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "IDMAP_TDB2" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/insmod.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/insmod.8 index 0af511cc..9edab6b2 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/insmod.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/insmod.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: insmod .\" Author: Jon Masters <jcm@jonmasters.org> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: insmod .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "INSMOD" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "insmod" +.TH "INSMOD" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "insmod" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/intro.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/intro.8 index a023443b..9afb40e7 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/intro.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/intro.8 @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ .\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:35:48 1993 by Rik Faith (faith@cs.unc.edu) .\" 2007-10-23 mtk: minor rewrites, and added paragraph on exit status .\" -.TH intro 8 2023-10-31 "Linux man-pages 6.06" +.TH intro 8 2024-05-02 "Linux man-pages 6.8" .SH NAME intro \- introduction to administration and privileged commands .SH DESCRIPTION diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-address.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-address.8 index 8e0de0e9..277c5068 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-address.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-address.8 @@ -146,7 +146,8 @@ ip-address \- protocol address management .BR ipvlan " |" .BR lowpan " |" .BR geneve " |" -.BR macsec " ]" +.BR macsec " |" +.BR netkit " ]" .SH "DESCRIPTION" The diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-ioam.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-ioam.8 index 1bdc0ece..c723d782 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-ioam.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-ioam.8 @@ -49,12 +49,17 @@ ip-ioam \- IPv6 In-situ OAM (IOAM) .RI " { " ID " | " .BR none " }" +.ti -8 +.B ip ioam monitor + .SH DESCRIPTION The \fBip ioam\fR command is used to configure IPv6 In-situ OAM (IOAM6) internal parameters, namely IOAM namespaces and schemas. .PP Those parameters also include the mapping between an IOAM namespace and an IOAM schema. +.PP +The \fBip ioam monitor\fR command displays IOAM data received. .SH EXAMPLES .PP diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-l2tp.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-l2tp.8 index 9aba6bec..7109c0a0 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-l2tp.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-l2tp.8 @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ If L2TP is being used over IPv6, use the IPv6 defrag module. .SH INTEROPERABILITY .PP Unmanaged (static) L2TPv3 tunnels are supported by some network -equipment equipment vendors such as Cisco. +equipment vendors such as Cisco. .PP In Linux, L2TP Hello messages are not supported in unmanaged tunnels. Hello messages are used by L2TP clients and servers to detect diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-link.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-link.8 index 209ae825..e3c71efd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-link.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-link.8 @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ ip-link \- network device configuration .RI "[ " ARGS " ]" .ti -8 -.BR "ip link set " { +.BR "ip link" " { " set " | " change " } " { .IR DEVICE " | " .BI "group " GROUP } @@ -247,6 +247,7 @@ ip-link \- network device configuration .BR macvlan " | " .BR macvtap " | " .BR netdevsim " |" +.BR netkit " |" .BR nlmon " |" .BR rmnet " |" .BR sit " |" @@ -384,6 +385,9 @@ Link types: .BR netdevsim - Interface for netdev API tests .sp +.BR netkit +- BPF-programmable network device +.sp .BR nlmon - Netlink monitoring device .sp @@ -441,6 +445,11 @@ TCP for IPv6 on this device when the size is greater than 65536. specifies the recommended maximum size of a IPv4 Generic Segment Offload packet the new device should accept. This is especially used to enable BIG TCP for IPv4 on this device by setting to a size greater than 65536. +Note that +.B gso_max_size +needs to be set to a size greater than or equal to +.B gso_ipv4_max_size +to really enable BIG TCP for IPv4. .TP .BI gso_max_segs " SEGMENTS " @@ -849,6 +858,46 @@ tunnel. .in -8 .TP +netkit Type Support +For a link of type +.I netkit +the following additional arguments are supported: + +.BI "ip link add " DEVICE +.BR type " netkit " +[ +.BI mode " MODE " +] [ +.I "POLICY " +] [ +.BR peer +[ +.I "POLICY " +] [ +.I "NAME " +] ] + +.in +8 + +.sp +.BI mode " MODE" +- specifies the operation mode of the netkit device with "l3" and "l2" +as possible values. Default option is "l3". + +.sp +.I "POLICY" +- specifies the default device policy when no BPF programs are attached +with "forward" and "blackhole" as possible values. Default option is +"forward". Specifying policy before the peer option refers to the primary +device, after the peer option refers to the peer device. + +.sp +.I "NAME" +- specifies the device name of the peer device. + +.in -8 + +.TP IPIP, SIT Type Support For a link of type .IR IPIP or SIT diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-netns.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-netns.8 index 93c85c71..20118eb3 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-netns.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-netns.8 @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ If NAME is available in /var/run/netns this command creates a new network namespace and assigns NAME. .TP -.B ip netns attach NAME PID - create a new named network namespace +.B ip netns attach NAME PID - assign a name to the network namespace of the process .sp If NAME is available in /var/run/netns this command attaches the network namespace of the process PID to NAME as if it were created with ip netns. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-route.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-route.8 index 8a7553c2..aa8a1a87 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-route.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip-route.8 @@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ ip-route \- routing table management .ti -8 .B ip route get .I ROUTE_GET_FLAGS +.B [ to ] .IR ADDRESS " [ " .BI from " ADDRESS " iif " STRING" .RB " ] [ " oif @@ -44,7 +45,9 @@ ip-route \- routing table management .B sport .IR NUMBER " ] [ " .B dport -.IR NUMBER " ] " +.IR NUMBER " ] [" +.B as +.IR ADDRESS " ]" .ti -8 .BR "ip route" " { " add " | " del " | " change " | " append " | "\ @@ -263,9 +266,14 @@ throw " | " unreachable " | " prohibit " | " blackhole " | " nat " ]" .ti -8 .IR ROUTE_GET_FLAGS " := " -.BR " [ " -.BR fibmatch -.BR " ] " +.IR ROUTE_GET_FLAG " [ " +.IR ROUTE_GET_FLAGS " ] " + +.ti -8 +.IR ROUTE_GET_FLAG " := " +.BR "[ " +.BR connected " | " fibmatch " | " notify +.BR "]" .SH DESCRIPTION .B ip route diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip.8 index 72227d44..fdae57c5 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ip.8 @@ -19,10 +19,12 @@ ip \- show / manipulate routing, network devices, interfaces and tunnels .ti -8 .IR OBJECT " := { " -.BR link " | " address " | " addrlabel " | " route " | " rule " | " neigh " | "\ - ntable " | " tunnel " | " tuntap " | " maddress " | " mroute " | " mrule " | "\ - monitor " | " xfrm " | " netns " | " l2tp " | " tcp_metrics " | " token " | "\ - macsec " | " vrf " | " mptcp " | " ioam " | " stats " }" +.BR address " | " addrlabel " | " fou " | " help " | " ila " | " ioam " | "\ + l2tp " | " link " | " macsec " | " maddress " | " monitor " | " mptcp " | "\ + mroute " | " mrule " | " neighbor " | " neighbour " | " netconf " | "\ + netns " | " nexthop " | " ntable " | " ntbl " | " route " | " rule " | "\ + sr " | " tap " | " tcpmetrics " | " token " | " tunnel " | " tuntap " | "\ + vrf " | " xfrm " }" .sp .ti -8 @@ -255,6 +257,14 @@ Request the kernel to send the applied configuration back. - label configuration for protocol address selection. .TP +.B fou +- Foo-over-UDP receive port configuration. + +.TP +.B ila +- manage identifier locator addresses (ILA). + +.TP .B ioam - manage IOAM namespaces and IOAM schemas. @@ -267,6 +277,10 @@ Request the kernel to send the applied configuration back. - network device. .TP +.B macsec +- MACsec device configuration. + +.TP .B maddress - multicast address. @@ -291,10 +305,18 @@ Request the kernel to send the applied configuration back. - manage ARP or NDISC cache entries. .TP +.B netconf +- network configuration monitoring. + +.TP .B netns - manage network namespaces. .TP +.B nexthop +- manage nexthop objects. + +.TP .B ntable - manage the neighbor cache's operation. @@ -307,12 +329,16 @@ Request the kernel to send the applied configuration back. - rule in routing policy database. .TP +.B sr +- manage IPv6 segment routing. + +.TP .B stats - manage and show interface statistics. .TP .B tcp_metrics/tcpmetrics -- manage TCP Metrics +- manage TCP Metrics. .TP .B token @@ -415,19 +441,24 @@ was written by Alexey N. Kuznetsov and added in Linux 2.2. .SH SEE ALSO .BR ip-address (8), .BR ip-addrlabel (8), +.BR ip-fou (8), .BR ip-ioam (8), .BR ip-l2tp (8), .BR ip-link (8), +.BR ip-macsec (8), .BR ip-maddress (8), .BR ip-monitor (8), .BR ip-mptcp (8), .BR ip-mroute (8), .BR ip-neighbour (8), +.BR ip-netconf (8), .BR ip-netns (8), +.BR ip-nexthop (8), .BR ip-ntable (8), .BR ip-route (8), .BR ip-rule (8), -.BR ip-stats (8) +.BR ip-sr (8), +.BR ip-stats (8), .BR ip-tcp_metrics (8), .BR ip-token (8), .BR ip-tunnel (8), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/kmod.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/kmod.8 index 7019d479..8784cb64 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/kmod.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/kmod.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: kmod .\" Author: Lucas De Marchi <lucas.de.marchi@gmail.com> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: kmod .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "KMOD" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "kmod" +.TH "KMOD" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "kmod" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ld.so.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ld.so.8 index 39ca874f..f33e7b02 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ld.so.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ld.so.8 @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ .\" Various parts: .\" Copyright (C) 2007-9, 2013, 2016 Michael Kerrisk <mtk.manpages@gmail.com> .\" -.TH ld.so 8 2024-02-12 "Linux man-pages 6.06" +.TH ld.so 8 2024-05-08 "Linux man-pages 6.8" .SH NAME ld.so, ld\-linux.so \- dynamic linker/loader .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -61,7 +61,6 @@ then it is searched for in the following order: Using the directories specified in the DT_RPATH dynamic section attribute of the binary if present and DT_RUNPATH attribute does not exist. -Use of DT_RPATH is deprecated. .IP (2) Using the environment variable .BR LD_LIBRARY_PATH , diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ldconfig.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ldconfig.8 index 7efb67fa..efbbf1a2 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ldconfig.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ldconfig.8 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ .\" .\" Modified, 6 May 2002, Michael Kerrisk, <mtk.manpages@gmail.com> .\" Change listed order of /usr/lib and /lib -.TH ldconfig 8 2023-10-31 "Linux man-pages 6.06" +.TH ldconfig 8 2024-05-02 "Linux man-pages 6.8" .SH NAME ldconfig \- configure dynamic linker run-time bindings .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/logsave.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/logsave.8 index 76536731..2def289b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/logsave.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/logsave.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 2003 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH LOGSAVE 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH LOGSAVE 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME logsave \- save the output of a command in a logfile .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpadmin.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpadmin.8 index ab180bb9..b75b775b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpadmin.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpadmin.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" lpadmin man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -229,4 +229,4 @@ Create an IPP Everywhere print queue: .BR lpoptions (1), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpc.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpc.8 index e9898c4a..f951304d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpc.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpc.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" lpc man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -56,4 +56,4 @@ command or another CUPS-compatible client with that functionality. .BR lpstat (1), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpinfo.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpinfo.8 index 2a1567ec..3e640669 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpinfo.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpinfo.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" lpinfo man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -124,4 +124,4 @@ Printers that do not support IPP can be supported using applications such as .BR lpadmin (8), CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpmove.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpmove.8 index d61a0e9d..ef0ce8f6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpmove.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lpmove.8 @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ .\" .\" lpmove man page for CUPS. .\" -.\" Copyright © 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +.\" Copyright © 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. .\" Copyright © 2007-2019 by Apple Inc. .\" Copyright © 1997-2006 by Easy Software Products. .\" @@ -73,4 +73,4 @@ Move all jobs from "oldprinter" to "newprinter": .br CUPS Online Help (http://localhost:631/help) .SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \[co] 2021-2023 by OpenPrinting. +Copyright \[co] 2020-2024 by OpenPrinting. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lsmod.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lsmod.8 index 87ef8f34..a804c3c2 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lsmod.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lsmod.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: lsmod .\" Author: Jon Masters <jcm@jonmasters.org> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: lsmod .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "LSMOD" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "lsmod" +.TH "LSMOD" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "lsmod" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lspci.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lspci.8 index 4bfd1a7b..e541de04 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/lspci.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/lspci.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH lspci 8 "25 February 2024" "pciutils-3.11.1" "The PCI Utilities" +.TH lspci 8 "05 April 2024" "pciutils-3.12.0" "The PCI Utilities" .SH NAME lspci \- list all PCI devices .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Show PCI vendor and device codes as both numbers and names. Use DNS to query the central PCI ID database if a device is not found in the local .B pci.ids file. If the DNS query succeeds, the result is cached in -.B ~/.pciids-cache +.B $XDG_CACHE_HOME/pci-ids and it is recognized in subsequent runs even if .B -q is not given any more. Please use this switch inside automated scripts only @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ utility to download the most recent version. .B /usr/share/hwdata/pci.ids.gz If lspci is compiled with support for compression, this file is tried before pci.ids. .TP -.B ~/.pciids-cache +.B $XDG_CACHE_HOME/pci-ids All ID's found in the DNS query mode are cached in this file. .SH BUGS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/makepkg.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/makepkg.8 index db2e52e2..729330d0 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/makepkg.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/makepkg.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: makepkg .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-02-06 +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 .\" Manual: Pacman Manual -.\" Source: Pacman 6.0.2 +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "MAKEPKG" "8" "2024\-02\-06" "Pacman 6\&.0\&.2" "Pacman Manual" +.TH "MAKEPKG" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ PKGDEST .PP \fB\-g, \-\-geninteg\fR .RS 4 -For each source file in the source array of PKGBUILD, download the file if required and generate integrity checks\&. The integrity checks generated are determined by the checks present in the PKGBUILD, falling back to the value of the INTEGRITY_CHECK array in makepkg\&.conf(5) if these are absent This output can be redirected into your PKGBUILD for source validation using "makepkg \-g >> PKGBUILD"\&. +For each source file in the source array of PKGBUILD, download the file if required and generate integrity checks\&. The integrity checks generated are determined by the checks present in the PKGBUILD, falling back to the value of the INTEGRITY_CHECK array in makepkg\&.conf(5) if these are absent\&. This output can be redirected into your PKGBUILD for source validation using "makepkg \-g >> PKGBUILD"\&. .RE .PP \fB\-\-skipinteg\fR @@ -198,6 +198,11 @@ Display version information\&. Remove the $srcdir before building the package\&. .RE .PP +\fB\-D\fR <dir>, \fB\-\-dir\fR <dir> +.RS 4 +Change to directory <dir> before reading the PKGBUILD or doing anything else\&. +.RE +.PP \fB\-\-allsource\fR .RS 4 Do not actually build the package, but build a source\-only tarball that includes all sources, including those that are normally downloaded via makepkg\&. This is useful for passing a single tarball to another program such as a chroot or remote builder\&. It will also satisfy requirements of the GPL when distributing binary packages\&. @@ -224,6 +229,11 @@ Do not run the check() function in the PKGBUILD or handle the checkdepends\&. Do not run the prepare() function in the PKGBUILD\&. .RE .PP +\fB\-\-noverify\fR +.RS 4 +Do not run the verify() function in the PKGBUILD\&. +.RE +.PP \fB\-\-sign\fR .RS 4 Sign the resulting package with gpg, overriding the setting in @@ -286,6 +296,11 @@ makepkg is designed to be compatible with Reproducible Builds\&. If the \fBSOURC If the \fBSOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\fR environment variable is not set, makepkg will use its own start date for internal use, but will not unify source file timestamps before building\&. .SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" .PP +\fBMAKEPKG_LIBRARY\fR="/path/to/directory" +.RS 4 +Use an alternative libmakepkg path instead of the /usr/share/makepkg default\&. +.RE +.PP \fBPACMAN\fR .RS 4 The command that will be used to check for missing dependencies and to install and remove packages\&. Pacman\(cqs @@ -382,6 +397,11 @@ The version of the \fI$BUILDTOOL\fR used\&. .RE +.PP +\fBGITFLAGS\fR +.RS 4 +The options to pass when checking out git sources, replacing the default "\-\-mirror"\&. +.RE .SH "CONFIGURATION" .sp See \fBmakepkg.conf\fR(5) for more details on configuring makepkg using the \fImakepkg\&.conf\fR file\&. @@ -515,17 +535,6 @@ Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> .sp -1 .IP \(bu 2.3 .\} -Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -.sp -1 -.IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp @@ -608,4 +617,15 @@ Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mke2fs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mke2fs.8 index d39c024b..74644166 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mke2fs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mke2fs.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH MKE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH MKE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system ] [ .B \-d -.I root-directory +.I root-directory|tarball ] [ .B \-D @@ -232,16 +232,18 @@ test is used instead of a fast read-only test. .TP .B \-C " cluster-size" Specify the size of cluster in bytes for file systems using the bigalloc -feature. Valid cluster-size values are from 2048 to 256M bytes per -cluster. This can only be specified if the bigalloc feature is -enabled. (See the +feature. Valid cluster-size values range from 2 to 32768 times the +filesystem blocksize and must be a power of 2. The cluster-size can +only be specified if the bigalloc feature is enabled. (See the .B ext4 (5) man page for more details about bigalloc.) The default cluster size if bigalloc is enabled is 16 times the block size. .TP -.BI \-d " root-directory" -Copy the contents of the given directory into the root directory of the -file system. +.BI \-d " root-directory|tarball" +Copy the contents of the given directory or tarball into the root directory of the +file system. Tarball input is only available if mke2fs was compiled with +libarchive support enabled and if the libarchive shared library is available +at run-time. The special value "-" will read a tarball from standard input. .TP .B \-D Use direct I/O when writing to the disk. This avoids mke2fs dirtying a @@ -406,6 +408,11 @@ The \fBroot_owner=\fR option allows explicitly specifying these values, and avoid side-effects for users that do not expect the contents of the file system to change based on the user running \fBmke2fs\fR. .TP +.BI root_perms [=permissions] +Specify the root directory permissions in octal format. If no permissions +are specified then the root directory permissions would be set in accordance with +the default filesystem umask. +.TP .B test_fs Set a flag in the file system superblock indicating that it may be mounted using experimental kernel code, such as the ext4dev file system. @@ -508,8 +515,8 @@ The default inode size is controlled by the file. In the .B mke2fs.conf file shipped with e2fsprogs, the default inode size is 256 bytes for -most file systems, except for small file systems where the inode size -will be 128 bytes. +all file systems, except for the GNU Hurd since it only supports +128-byte inodes. .TP .B \-j Create the file system with an ext3 journal. If the diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.btrfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.btrfs.8 index d3a88275..03e2b774 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.btrfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.btrfs.8 @@ -1,3 +1,4 @@ +'\" t .\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. . . @@ -27,7 +28,7 @@ level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] .in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u .. -.TH "MKFS.BTRFS" "8" "Feb 14, 2024" "6.7.1" "BTRFS" +.TH "MKFS.BTRFS" "8" "May 03, 2024" "6.8.1" "BTRFS" .SH NAME mkfs.btrfs \- create a btrfs filesystem .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -63,7 +64,7 @@ effectively specifies the size of the filesystem. .BI \-\-csum \ <type>\fR,\fB \ \-\-checksum \ <type> Specify the checksum algorithm. Default is \fIcrc32c\fP\&. Valid values are \fIcrc32c\fP, \fIxxhash\fP, \fIsha256\fP or \fIblake2\fP\&. To mount such filesystem kernel must support the -checksums as well. See section \fI\%CHECKSUM ALGORITHMS\fP +checksums as well. See section \X'tty: link #man-mkfs-checksum-algorithms'\fI\%CHECKSUM ALGORITHMS\fP\X'tty: link' in \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP\&. .UNINDENT .INDENT 0.0 @@ -169,7 +170,7 @@ Specify the sectorsize, the minimum data block allocation unit. Versions prior to 6.7 set the sectorsize matching the host CPU page size, starting in 6.7 this is 4KiB for cross\-architecture compatibility. Please read more about the \fI\%subpage block size support\fP -and \fI\%its status\fP\&. +and \X'tty: link #status-subpage-block-size'\fI\%its status\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -232,11 +233,9 @@ for more details. To see all available features that .INDENT 7.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX $ mkfs.btrfs \-O list\-all -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .TP @@ -309,11 +308,9 @@ devices to scan at the time of mount. .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # mount \-o device=/dev/sdb,device=/dev/sdc /dev/sda /mnt -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -337,7 +334,7 @@ RAID5/6 has known problems and should not be used in production. .SH FILESYSTEM FEATURES .sp Features that can be enabled during creation time. See also \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP section -\fI\%FILESYSTEM FEATURES\fP\&. +\X'tty: link #man-btrfs5-filesystem-features'\fI\%FILESYSTEM FEATURES\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .INDENT 0.0 .TP .B mixed\-bg @@ -379,7 +376,7 @@ stored as an extent, saves a few percent of metadata if sparse files are used (kernel support since 5.12) .sp zoned mode, data allocation and write friendly to zoned/SMR/ZBC/ZNS devices, -see \fI\%ZONED MODE\fP in +see \X'tty: link #man-btrfs5-zoned-mode'\fI\%ZONED MODE\fP\X'tty: link' in \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP, the mode is automatically selected when a zoned device is detected .TP @@ -422,14 +419,23 @@ conversion is not possible. .INDENT 0.0 .TP .B raid\-stripe\-tree -(kernel support since 6.7) +(kernel support since 6.7, CONFIG_BTRFS_DEBUG) .sp -New tree for logical file extent mapping where the physical mapping -may not match on multiple devices. this is now used in zoned mode to +Separate tree for logical file extent mapping where the physical mapping +may not match on multiple devices. This is now used in zoned mode to implement RAID0/RAID1* profiles, but can be used in non\-zoned mode as well. The support for RAID56 is in development and will eventually fix the problems with the current implementation. This is a backward incompatible feature and has to be enabled at mkfs time. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 7.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Due to the status of implementation it is enabled only in +builds with CONFIG_BTRFS_DEBUG. Support by the kernel module +can be found in the sysfs feature list. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT .TP .B squota (kernel support since 6.7) @@ -479,9 +485,8 @@ and constraints, see the section \fI\%PROFILES\fP for more details .sp There are the following block group types available: .TS -center; -|l|l|l|l|l|l|. -_ +box center; +l|l|l|l|l|l. T{ Profiles T} T{ @@ -615,7 +620,6 @@ T} T{ T} T{ 3/any (see note 3) T} -_ .TE .sp \fBWARNING:\fP @@ -654,9 +658,8 @@ the free/allocated space and may appear random. All devices are assumed to be present at the time of the blocks would have been written. .SS RAID1 .TS -center; -|l|l|l|l|. -_ +box center; +l|l|l|l. T{ device 1 T} T{ @@ -698,13 +701,11 @@ T} T{ B T} T{ T} -_ .TE .SS RAID1C3 .TS -center; -|l|l|l|l|. -_ +box center; +l|l|l|l. T{ device 1 T} T{ @@ -750,13 +751,11 @@ C T} T{ B T} -_ .TE .SS RAID0 .TS -center; -|l|l|l|l|. -_ +box center; +l|l|l|l. T{ device 1 T} T{ @@ -806,13 +805,11 @@ C4 T} T{ A4 T} -_ .TE .SS RAID5 .TS -center; -|l|l|l|l|. -_ +box center; +l|l|l|l. T{ device 1 T} T{ @@ -862,13 +859,11 @@ PC T} T{ PA T} -_ .TE .SS RAID6 .TS -center; -|l|l|l|l|. -_ +box center; +l|l|l|l. T{ device 1 T} T{ @@ -918,7 +913,6 @@ PC T} T{ PA T} -_ .TE .SH DUP PROFILES ON A SINGLE DEVICE .sp @@ -967,8 +961,7 @@ to be created and could end up in the following situation: .INDENT 0.0 .INDENT 3.5 .sp -.nf -.ft C +.EX # mkfs.btrfs \-f \-n 65536 /dev/loop0 btrfs\-progs v3.19\-rc2\-405\-g976307c See https://btrfs.readthedocs.io for more information. @@ -992,8 +985,7 @@ Devices: # mount /dev/loop0 /mnt/ mount: mount /dev/loop0 on /mnt failed: No space left on device -.ft P -.fi +.EE .UNINDENT .UNINDENT .sp @@ -1003,12 +995,12 @@ than can fit into the filesystem. .SH AVAILABILITY .sp \fBbtrfs\fP is part of btrfs\-progs. Please refer to the documentation at -\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\&. +\X'tty: link https://btrfs.readthedocs.io'\fI\%https://btrfs.readthedocs.io\fP\X'tty: link'\&. .SH SEE ALSO .sp \fI\%btrfs(5)\fP, \fI\%btrfs(8)\fP, \fI\%btrfs\-balance(8)\fP, -\fBwipefs(8)\fP +\X'tty: link https://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man8/wipefs.8.html'\fI\%wipefs(8)\fP\X'tty: link' .\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. . diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext2.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext2.8 index d39c024b..74644166 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext2.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext2.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH MKE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH MKE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system ] [ .B \-d -.I root-directory +.I root-directory|tarball ] [ .B \-D @@ -232,16 +232,18 @@ test is used instead of a fast read-only test. .TP .B \-C " cluster-size" Specify the size of cluster in bytes for file systems using the bigalloc -feature. Valid cluster-size values are from 2048 to 256M bytes per -cluster. This can only be specified if the bigalloc feature is -enabled. (See the +feature. Valid cluster-size values range from 2 to 32768 times the +filesystem blocksize and must be a power of 2. The cluster-size can +only be specified if the bigalloc feature is enabled. (See the .B ext4 (5) man page for more details about bigalloc.) The default cluster size if bigalloc is enabled is 16 times the block size. .TP -.BI \-d " root-directory" -Copy the contents of the given directory into the root directory of the -file system. +.BI \-d " root-directory|tarball" +Copy the contents of the given directory or tarball into the root directory of the +file system. Tarball input is only available if mke2fs was compiled with +libarchive support enabled and if the libarchive shared library is available +at run-time. The special value "-" will read a tarball from standard input. .TP .B \-D Use direct I/O when writing to the disk. This avoids mke2fs dirtying a @@ -406,6 +408,11 @@ The \fBroot_owner=\fR option allows explicitly specifying these values, and avoid side-effects for users that do not expect the contents of the file system to change based on the user running \fBmke2fs\fR. .TP +.BI root_perms [=permissions] +Specify the root directory permissions in octal format. If no permissions +are specified then the root directory permissions would be set in accordance with +the default filesystem umask. +.TP .B test_fs Set a flag in the file system superblock indicating that it may be mounted using experimental kernel code, such as the ext4dev file system. @@ -508,8 +515,8 @@ The default inode size is controlled by the file. In the .B mke2fs.conf file shipped with e2fsprogs, the default inode size is 256 bytes for -most file systems, except for small file systems where the inode size -will be 128 bytes. +all file systems, except for the GNU Hurd since it only supports +128-byte inodes. .TP .B \-j Create the file system with an ext3 journal. If the diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext3.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext3.8 index d39c024b..74644166 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext3.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext3.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH MKE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH MKE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system ] [ .B \-d -.I root-directory +.I root-directory|tarball ] [ .B \-D @@ -232,16 +232,18 @@ test is used instead of a fast read-only test. .TP .B \-C " cluster-size" Specify the size of cluster in bytes for file systems using the bigalloc -feature. Valid cluster-size values are from 2048 to 256M bytes per -cluster. This can only be specified if the bigalloc feature is -enabled. (See the +feature. Valid cluster-size values range from 2 to 32768 times the +filesystem blocksize and must be a power of 2. The cluster-size can +only be specified if the bigalloc feature is enabled. (See the .B ext4 (5) man page for more details about bigalloc.) The default cluster size if bigalloc is enabled is 16 times the block size. .TP -.BI \-d " root-directory" -Copy the contents of the given directory into the root directory of the -file system. +.BI \-d " root-directory|tarball" +Copy the contents of the given directory or tarball into the root directory of the +file system. Tarball input is only available if mke2fs was compiled with +libarchive support enabled and if the libarchive shared library is available +at run-time. The special value "-" will read a tarball from standard input. .TP .B \-D Use direct I/O when writing to the disk. This avoids mke2fs dirtying a @@ -406,6 +408,11 @@ The \fBroot_owner=\fR option allows explicitly specifying these values, and avoid side-effects for users that do not expect the contents of the file system to change based on the user running \fBmke2fs\fR. .TP +.BI root_perms [=permissions] +Specify the root directory permissions in octal format. If no permissions +are specified then the root directory permissions would be set in accordance with +the default filesystem umask. +.TP .B test_fs Set a flag in the file system superblock indicating that it may be mounted using experimental kernel code, such as the ext4dev file system. @@ -508,8 +515,8 @@ The default inode size is controlled by the file. In the .B mke2fs.conf file shipped with e2fsprogs, the default inode size is 256 bytes for -most file systems, except for small file systems where the inode size -will be 128 bytes. +all file systems, except for the GNU Hurd since it only supports +128-byte inodes. .TP .B \-j Create the file system with an ext3 journal. If the diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext4.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext4.8 index d39c024b..74644166 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext4.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.ext4.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH MKE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH MKE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ mke2fs \- create an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system ] [ .B \-d -.I root-directory +.I root-directory|tarball ] [ .B \-D @@ -232,16 +232,18 @@ test is used instead of a fast read-only test. .TP .B \-C " cluster-size" Specify the size of cluster in bytes for file systems using the bigalloc -feature. Valid cluster-size values are from 2048 to 256M bytes per -cluster. This can only be specified if the bigalloc feature is -enabled. (See the +feature. Valid cluster-size values range from 2 to 32768 times the +filesystem blocksize and must be a power of 2. The cluster-size can +only be specified if the bigalloc feature is enabled. (See the .B ext4 (5) man page for more details about bigalloc.) The default cluster size if bigalloc is enabled is 16 times the block size. .TP -.BI \-d " root-directory" -Copy the contents of the given directory into the root directory of the -file system. +.BI \-d " root-directory|tarball" +Copy the contents of the given directory or tarball into the root directory of the +file system. Tarball input is only available if mke2fs was compiled with +libarchive support enabled and if the libarchive shared library is available +at run-time. The special value "-" will read a tarball from standard input. .TP .B \-D Use direct I/O when writing to the disk. This avoids mke2fs dirtying a @@ -406,6 +408,11 @@ The \fBroot_owner=\fR option allows explicitly specifying these values, and avoid side-effects for users that do not expect the contents of the file system to change based on the user running \fBmke2fs\fR. .TP +.BI root_perms [=permissions] +Specify the root directory permissions in octal format. If no permissions +are specified then the root directory permissions would be set in accordance with +the default filesystem umask. +.TP .B test_fs Set a flag in the file system superblock indicating that it may be mounted using experimental kernel code, such as the ext4dev file system. @@ -508,8 +515,8 @@ The default inode size is controlled by the file. In the .B mke2fs.conf file shipped with e2fsprogs, the default inode size is 256 bytes for -most file systems, except for small file systems where the inode size -will be 128 bytes. +all file systems, except for the GNU Hurd since it only supports +128-byte inodes. .TP .B \-j Create the file system with an ext3 journal. If the diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.xfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.xfs.8 index 891570d0..e4852572 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.xfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkfs.xfs.8 @@ -504,6 +504,33 @@ directories. By default, .B mkfs.xfs will not enable DAX mode. +.TP +.BI concurrency= value +Create enough allocation groups to handle the desired level of concurrency. +The goal of this calculation scheme is to set the number of allocation groups +to an integer multiple of the number of writer threads desired, to minimize +contention of AG locks. +This scheme will neither create fewer AGs than would be created by the default +configuration, nor will it create AGs smaller than 4GB. +This option is not compatible with the +.B agcount +or +.B agsize +options. +The magic value +.I nr_cpus +or +.I 1 +or no value at all will set this parameter to the number of active processors +in the system. +If the kernel advertises that the data device is a non-mechanical storage +device, +.B mkfs.xfs +will use this new geometry calculation scheme. +The magic value of +.I 0 +forces use of the older AG geometry calculations that is used for mechanical +storage. .RE .TP .B \-f @@ -768,6 +795,25 @@ if you want to disable this feature for older kernels which don't support it. .IP This option is only tunable on the deprecated V4 format. +.TP +.BI concurrency= value +Allocate a log that is estimated to be large enough to handle the desired level +of concurrency without userspace program threads contending for log space. +This scheme will neither create a log smaller than the minimum required, +nor create a log larger than the maximum possible. +This option is only valid for internal logs and is not compatible with the +size option. +This option is not compatible with the +.B logdev +or +.B size +options. +The magic value +.I nr_cpus +or +.I 1 +or no value at all will set this parameter to the number of active processors +in the system. .RE .PP .PD 0 diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkinitcpio.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkinitcpio.8 index 1b990915..2e01dd40 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkinitcpio.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mkinitcpio.8 @@ -1,637 +1,713 @@ '\" t .\" Title: mkinitcpio -.\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] -.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 12/03/2023 +.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] +.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.21 +.\" Date: 2024-04-27 .\" Manual: mkinitcpio manual -.\" Source: \ \& mkinitcpio 37.1 +.\" Source: \ \& .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "MKINITCPIO" "8" "12/03/2023" "\ \& mkinitcpio 37\&.1" "mkinitcpio manual" -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" * Define some portability stuff -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673 -.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html -.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.TH "MKINITCPIO" "8" "2024-04-27" "\ \&" "mkinitcpio manual" .ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq .el .ds Aq ' -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" * set default formatting -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" disable hyphenation +.ss \n[.ss] 0 .nh -.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only) .ad l -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE * -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.de URL +\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 +.. +.als MTO URL +.if \n[.g] \{\ +. mso www.tmac +. am URL +. ad l +. . +. am MTO +. ad l +. . +. LINKSTYLE blue R < > +.\} .SH "NAME" mkinitcpio \- Create an initial ramdisk environment .SH "SYNOPSIS" .sp -\fImkinitcpio\fR [options] +\fImkinitcpio\fP [options] .SH "DESCRIPTION" .sp -Creates an initial ramdisk environment for booting the Linux kernel\&. The initial ramdisk is in essence a very small environment (early userspace) which loads various kernel modules and sets up necessary things before handing over control to init\&. This makes it possible to have, for example, encrypted root file systems and root file systems on a software RAID array\&. mkinitcpio allows for easy extension with custom hooks, has autodetection at runtime, and many other features\&. +Creates an initial ramdisk environment for booting the Linux kernel. The +initial ramdisk is in essence a very small environment (early userspace) which +loads various kernel modules and sets up necessary things before handing over +control to init. This makes it possible to have, for example, encrypted root +file systems and root file systems on a software RAID array. mkinitcpio allows +for easy extension with custom hooks, has autodetection at runtime, and many +other features. .SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -\fB\-A\fR, \fB\-\-addhooks\fR \fIhooks\fR +.sp +\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-addhooks\fP \fIhooks\fP .RS 4 -Add the additional -\fIhooks\fR -to the image\&. These will be processed in order after all other hooks from the config file\&. Multiple hooks should be comma\-separated\&. This option can be specified multiple times\&. +Add the additional \fIhooks\fP to the image. These will be processed in order +after all other hooks from the config file. Multiple hooks should be +comma\-separated. This option can be specified multiple times. .RE -.PP -\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-config\fR \fIconfig\fR +.sp +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIconfig\fP .RS 4 -Use -\fIconfig\fR -file to generate the ramdisk\&. Default: -\fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.conf\fR\&. If specified, drop\-in files in -\fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.conf\&.d/\fR -will be ignored\&. +Use \fIconfig\fP file to generate the ramdisk. Default: \fI/etc/mkinitcpio.conf\fP. +If specified, drop\-in files in \fI/etc/mkinitcpio.conf.d/\fP will be ignored. .RE -.PP -\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-generatedir\fR \fIdirectory\fR +.sp +\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-generatedir\fP \fIdirectory\fP .RS 4 -Set -\fIdirectory\fR -as the location where the initramfs is built\&. This might be useful to generate a shutdown ramfs in -\fI/run/initramfs/\fR\&. +Set \fIdirectory\fP as the location where the initramfs is built. This might be +useful to generate a shutdown ramfs in \fI/run/initramfs/\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB\-D\fR, \fB\-\-hookdir\fR \fIdirectory\fR +.sp +\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-hookdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP .RS 4 -Set -\fIdirectory\fR -as the location where hooks will be searched for when generating the image\&. +Set \fIdirectory\fP as the location where hooks will be searched for when +generating the image. .RE -.PP -\fB\-g\fR, \fB\-\-generate\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-generate\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -Generate a CPIO image as -\fIfilename\fR\&. Default: no; this means nothing will be written to the file system unless this option is specified\&. +Generate a CPIO image as \fIfilename\fP. Default: no; this means nothing will be +written to the file system unless this option is specified. .RE -.PP -\fB\-H\fR, \fB\-\-hookhelp\fR \fIhookname\fR +.sp +\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-hookhelp\fP \fIhookname\fP .RS 4 -Output help for hookname -\fIhookname\fR\&. +Output help for hookname \fIhookname\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR +.sp +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP .RS 4 -Output a short overview of available command\-line switches\&. +Output a short overview of available command\-line switches. .RE -.PP -\fB\-k\fR, \fB\-\-kernel\fR \fIkernelversion\fR +.sp +\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-\-kernel\fP \fIkernelversion\fP .RS 4 -Use -\fIkernelversion\fR, instead of the current running kernel\&. This may be a path to a kernel image (only supported for x86\-based architectures), a specific kernel version or the special keyword -\fInone\fR\&. In the latter case, no kernel modules are added to the image\&. +Use \fIkernelversion\fP, instead of the current running kernel. This may be a +path to a kernel image (only supported for x86\-based architectures), a +specific kernel version or the special keyword \fInone\fP. In the latter case, +no kernel modules are added to the image. .RE -.PP -\fB\-L\fR, \fB\-\-listhooks\fR +.sp +\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-listhooks\fP .RS 4 -List all available hooks\&. +List all available hooks. .RE -.PP -\fB\-M\fR, \fB\-\-automods\fR +.sp +\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-automods\fP .RS 4 -Display modules found via autodetection\&. mkinitcpio will automatically try to determine which kernel modules are needed to start your computer\&. This option lists which modules were detected\&. +Display modules found via autodetection. mkinitcpio will automatically try +to determine which kernel modules are needed to start your computer. This +option lists which modules were detected. .RE -.PP -\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-nocolor\fR +.sp +\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-nocolor\fP .RS 4 -Disable color output\&. +Disable color output. .RE -.PP -\fB\-U\fR, \fB\-\-uki\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uki\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -Generate a unified kernel image as -\fIfilename\fR\&. If a CPIO image is successfully built, it will be used to generate a unified kernel image for UEFI booting\&. This combines the initramfs, the kernel, any specified microcode and the kernel cmdline into one executable\&. This is useful for boot chain integrity where the file is signed\&. Default: no\&. For a list of relevant options see -\fIOptions for unified kernel image\fR -below\&. +Generate a unified kernel image as \fIfilename\fP. If a CPIO image is +successfully built, it will be used to generate a unified kernel image for +UEFI booting. This combines the initramfs, the kernel, and the kernel +cmdline into one executable. This is useful for boot chain integrity where +the file is signed. Default: no. +For a list of relevant options see \fIOptions for unified kernel image\fP below. .RE -.PP -\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-allpresets\fR +.sp +\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-allpresets\fP .RS 4 -Process all presets contained in -\fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.d\fR\&. See the -\fB\-p\fR -option for more detail about presets\&. +Process all presets contained in \fI/etc/mkinitcpio.d\fP. See the \fB\-p\fP option +for more detail about presets. .RE -.PP -\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-preset\fR \fIpreset\fR +.sp +\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-preset\fP \fIpreset\fP .RS 4 -Build initramfs image(s) according to specified -\fIpreset\fR\&. This may be a file in /etc/mkinitcpio\&.d (without the \&.preset extension) or a full, absolute path to a file\&. This option may be specified multiple times to process multiple presets\&. +Build initramfs image(s) according to specified \fIpreset\fP. This may be a file +in /etc/mkinitcpio.d (without the .preset extension) or a full, absolute +path to a file. This option may be specified multiple times to process +multiple presets. .RE -.PP -\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-remove\fR +.sp +\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-remove\fP .RS 4 -Remove initramfs image(s) generated by the specified preset(s)\&. If used in combination with -\fB\-P\fR|\fB\-\-allpresets\fR, removes the images for all presets\&. This option can only be used with either -\fB\-p\fR|\fB\-\-presets\fR -or -\fB\-P\fR|\fB\-\-allpresets\fR\&. +Remove initramfs image(s) generated by the specified preset(s). +If used in combination with \fB\-P\fP|\fB\-\-allpresets\fP, removes the images for all +presets. This option can only be used with either \fB\-p\fP|\fB\-\-presets\fP or +\fB\-P\fP|\fB\-\-allpresets\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-moduleroot\fR \fIroot\fR +.sp +\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-moduleroot\fP \fIroot\fP .RS 4 -Specifies the root directory to find modules in, defaulting to -\fI/\fR\&. +Specifies the root directory to find modules in, defaulting to \fI/\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-skiphooks\fR \fIhooks\fR +.sp +\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-skiphooks\fP \fIhooks\fP .RS 4 -Skip -\fIhooks\fR -when generating the image\&. Multiple hooks should be comma\-separated\&. This option can be specified multiple times\&. +Skip \fIhooks\fP when generating the image. Multiple hooks should be +comma\-separated. This option can be specified multiple times. .RE -.PP -\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-save\fR +.sp +\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-save\fP .RS 4 -Saves the build directory for the initial ramdisk\&. Default: no; This means the directory will not be retained if this option is not specified\&. Useful for debugging purposes\&. +Saves the build directory for the initial ramdisk. Default: no; This means +the directory will not be retained if this option is not specified. Useful +for debugging purposes. .RE -.PP -\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-builddir\fR \fItmpdir\fR +.sp +\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-builddir\fP \fItmpdir\fP .RS 4 -Use -\fItmpdir\fR -as the temporary build directory instead of -\fI/tmp\fR\&. -\fItmpdir\fR -must exist\&. The -\fITMPDIR\fR -environment variable is also honored to set this location, but the command line option will take precedence\&. +Use \fItmpdir\fP as the temporary build directory instead of \fI/tmp\fP. \fItmpdir\fP +must exist. The \fITMPDIR\fP environment variable is also honored to set this +location, but the command line option will take precedence. .RE -.PP -\fB\-V\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR +.sp +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP .RS 4 -Display version information\&. +Display version information. .RE -.PP -\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR +.sp +\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP .RS 4 -Verbose output\&. Outputs more information about what is happening during creation of the ramdisk\&. +Verbose output. Outputs more information about what is happening during +creation of the ramdisk. .RE -.PP -\fB\-z\fR, \fB\-\-compress\fR \fIcompress\fR +.sp +\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-compress\fP \fIcompress\fP .RS 4 -Override the compression method with the -\fIcompress\fR -program\&. +Override the compression method with the \fIcompress\fP program. .RE .SH "OPTIONS FOR UNIFIED KERNEL IMAGE" -.PP -\fB\-\-cmdline\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-cmdline\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -Use kernel command line with unified kernel image\&. If none is specified, try one of the files -\fI/etc/kernel/cmdline\fR, -\fI/usr/share/kernel/cmdline\fR -or -\fI/proc/cmdline\fR\&. +Use kernel command line with unified kernel image. If none is specified, +try one of the files \fI/etc/kernel/cmdline\fP, \fI/usr/lib/kernel/cmdline\fP +or \fI/proc/cmdline\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB\-\-no\-cmdline\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-no\-cmdline\fP .RS 4 -Omit embedding a kernel command line string in the unified kernel image\&. Kernel command line options will need to be passed via the kernel command line\&. Overrides the -\fB\-\-cmdline\fR -option\&. +Omit embedding a kernel command line string in the unified kernel image. +Kernel command line options will need to be passed via the kernel command +line. +Overrides the \fB\-\-cmdline\fP option. .RE -.PP -\fB\-\-splash\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-splash\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -UEFI executables can show a bitmap file on boot\&. +UEFI executables can show a bitmap file on boot. .RE -.PP -\fB\-\-uefistub\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-uefistub\fP \fIfilename\fP +.RS 4 +UEFI stub image used for unified kernel image generation. Has no effect +if \fIukify\fP is being used. +Default: Attempts to look for a systemd\-boot or gummiboot +stub loader. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-\-ukiconfig\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -UEFI stub image used for unified kernel image generation\&. Default: Attempts to look for a systemd\-boot or gummiboot stub loader\&. +Configuration file to pass to \fIukify\fP. If none is specified, try one of the +files \fI/etc/kernel/uki.conf\fP or \fI/usr/lib/kernel/uki.conf\fP. If neither of +those exists, \fIukify\fP will use its internal default. .RE -.PP -\fB\-\-kernelimage\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-no\-ukify\fP .RS 4 -Include a kernel image for the unified kernel image\&. Default: one of or -\fI/boot/vmlinuz\-linux\fR\&. +Do not use \fIukify\fP to build UKIs even if it is available. This is not +recommended. .RE -.PP -\fB\-\-microcode\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-kernelimage\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -Include microcode into the unified kernel image\&. Default: no\&. +Include a kernel image for the unified kernel image. Default: one of +\fI/lib/modules/${KERNELVERSION}/vmlinuz\fP, \fI/boot/vmlinuz\-${KERNELVERSION}\fP, +or \fI/boot/vmlinuz\-linux\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB\-\-osrelease\fR \fIfilename\fR +.sp +\fB\-\-osrelease\fP \fIfilename\fP .RS 4 -Include a os\-release file for the unified kernel image\&. Default: -\fI/etc/os\-release\fR -or -\fI/usr/lib/os\-release\fR\&. +Include a os\-release file for the unified kernel image. +Default: \fI/etc/os\-release\fP or \fI/usr/lib/os\-release\fP. .RE .SH "ABOUT PRESETS" .sp -A preset is a pre\-defined definition on how to create an initial ramdisk\&. Instead of specifying the configuration file and which output file, every time you generate a new initial ramdisk, you define a preset and use the \fB\-p\fR switch to generate an initial ramdisk according to your preset\&. +A preset is a pre\-defined definition on how to create an initial ramdisk. +Instead of specifying the configuration file and which output file, every time +you generate a new initial ramdisk, you define a preset and use the \fB\-p\fP switch +to generate an initial ramdisk according to your preset. +.sp +Typically, presets are files located in \fI/etc/mkinitcpio.d/\fP with the extension +\fI.preset\fP, e.g. \fI/etc/mkinitcpio.d/linux.preset\fP for the \fBlinux\fP preset. +It is possible to use files in other locations, too. Then the path to this +file needs to be specified. .sp -Typically, presets are files located in \fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.d/\fR with the extension \fI\&.preset\fR, e\&.g\&. \fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.d/linux\&.preset\fR for the \fBlinux\fR preset\&. It is possible to use files in other locations, too\&. Then the path to this file needs to be specified\&. +Presets files are shell scripts that get sourced by mkinitcpio and the following +variables will influence its behavior. .sp -Presets files are shell scripts that get sourced by mkinitcpio and the following variables will influence its behavior\&. +Note, that mkinitcpio calls itself for each preset and passes the options +defined in the preset file file via command line arguments. Those are mentioned +in the description of the options below, so refer to the manual of the command +line arguments for more information about a particular option. .sp -Note, that mkinitcpio calls itself for each preset and passes the options defined in the preset file file via command line arguments\&. Those are mentioned in the description of the options below, so refer to the manual of the command line arguments for more information about a particular option\&. -.PP -\fBPRESETS\fR +\fBPRESETS\fP .RS 4 -An array of preset names defined in this file\&. These names will be used as prefix to other options to provide preset\-specific options\&. For example, if a -\fIPRESET=(\*(Aqcustom\*(Aq)\fR -is given, then the image is specified via -\fIcustom_image=\*(Aq/boot/custom\&.img\*(Aq\fR\&. +An array of preset names defined in this file. These names will be +used as prefix to other options to provide preset\-specific options. +For example, if a +\fIPRESET=(\*(Aqcustom\*(Aq)\fP is given, then the image is specified via +\fIcustom_image=\*(Aq/boot/custom.img\*(Aq\fP. .RE -.PP -\fB<preset>_kver\fR (defaults to value of \fBALL_kver\fR \(em one of the two is \fBrequired\fR) +.sp +\fB<preset>_kver\fP (defaults to value of \fBALL_kver\fP \(em one of the two is \fBrequired\fP) .RS 4 -Specify the Kernel version (via -\fB\-k\fR -in mkinitcpio)\&. +Specify the Kernel version (via \fB\-k\fP in mkinitcpio). .RE -.PP -\fB<preset>_config\fR (defaults to value of \fBALL_config\fR \(em one of the two is \fBrequired\fR) +.sp +\fB<preset>_config\fP (defaults to value of \fBALL_config\fP \(em one of the two is \fBrequired\fP) .RS 4 -Path to the configuration file (passed via -\fB\-c\fR -to mkinitcpio)\&. +Path to the configuration file (passed via \fB\-c\fP to mkinitcpio). .RE -.PP -\fB<preset>_uki\fR (one of \fB<preset>_uki\fR and \fB<preset>_image\fR is \fBrequired\fR) +.sp +\fB<preset>_uki\fP (one of \fB<preset>_uki\fP and \fB<preset>_image\fP is \fBrequired\fP) .RS 4 -Output file path for a unified kernel image (passed via -\fB\-U\fR -to mkinitcpio)\&. +Output file path for a unified kernel image (passed via \fB\-U\fP to mkinitcpio). .RE -.PP -\fB<preset>_image\fR (one of \fB<preset>_uki\fR and \fB<preset>_image\fR is \fBrequired\fR) +.sp +\fB<preset>_image\fP (one of \fB<preset>_uki\fP and \fB<preset>_image\fP is \fBrequired\fP) .RS 4 -Output file path for the generated image (passed via -\fB\-g\fR -to mkinitcpio)\&. +Output file path for the generated image (passed via \fB\-g\fP to mkinitcpio). .RE -.PP -\fB<preset>_options\fR +.sp +\fB<preset>_options\fP .RS 4 -Further command line arguments to pass to mkinitcpio as a string or array\&. They will get appended at the end of the call to mkinitcpio (after all the options mentioned above), so this can be used to overwrite options (for example pass a -\fB\-S\fR -\fIhook\fR -here to skip a hook)\&. +Further command line arguments to pass to mkinitcpio as a string or array. +They will get appended at the end of the call to mkinitcpio (after all the +options mentioned above), so this can be used to overwrite options (for +example pass a \fB\-S\fP \fIhook\fP here to skip a hook). .RE .SH "ABOUT INSTALL HOOKS" .sp -Install hooks are bash scripts which are sourced during mkinitcpio runtime in order to add modules, binaries, and other files to the image\&. A variety of functions exist to facilitate this\&. -.PP -\fBadd_module\fR \fImodname\fR +Install hooks are bash scripts which are sourced during mkinitcpio runtime in +order to add modules, binaries, and other files to the image. A variety of +functions exist to facilitate this. +.sp +\fBadd_module\fP \fImodname\fP +.RS 4 +Adds the module specified by \fImodname\fP to the image. Dependencies are +derived and added automatically. +.RE +.sp +\fBadd_binary\fP \fIbinary\fP [ \fIdestination\fP ] [ \fImode\fP ] +.RS 4 +Adds a binary to the image. The argument \fIbinary\fP need not be an absolute +path and, if needed, a lookup will be performed. If the binary is a +dynamically linked ELF binary, dependencies will be automatically added. If +it is a symlink, both the symlink and the target binary will be added. +Optionally, a destination within the initramfs image as well as a file mode +can be specified. By default, the destination and mode be taken from the +source derived from \fIbinary\fP. +.RE +.sp +\fBadd_file\fP \fIpath\fP [ \fIdestination\fP ] [ \fImode\fP ] .RS 4 -Adds the module specified by -\fImodname\fR -to the image\&. Dependencies are derived and added automatically\&. +Adds a file and any needed parent directories to the image. If it is a +symlink, both the symlink and the target file will be added. Optionally, a +destination within the initramfs image as well as a file mode can be +specified. By default, the destination and mode will be taken from the +source and mode of the file specified by the \fIpath\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_binary\fR \fIbinary\fR [ \fIdestination\fR ] [ \fImode\fR ] +.sp +\fBadd_file_early\fP \fIpath\fP [ \fIdestination\fP ] [ \fImode\fP ] .RS 4 -Adds a binary to the image\&. The argument -\fIbinary\fR -need not be an absolute path and, if needed, a lookup will be performed\&. If the binary is a dynamically linked ELF binary, dependencies will be automatically added\&. If it is a symlink, both the symlink and the target binary will be added\&. Optionally, a destination within the initramfs image as well as a file mode can be specified\&. By default, the destination and mode be taken from the source derived from -\fIbinary\fR\&. +Adds a file and any needed parent directories to the early uncompressed +image. Works the same way as \fBadd_file\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_file\fR \fIpath\fR [ \fIdestination\fR ] [ \fImode\fR ] +.sp +\fBadd_dir\fP \fIpath\fP .RS 4 -Adds a file and any needed parent directories to the image\&. If it is a symlink, both the symlink and the target file will be added\&. Optionally, a destination within the initramfs image as well as a file mode can be specified\&. By default, the destination and mode will be taken from the source and mode of the file specified by the -\fIpath\fR\&. +Adds a directory and its parents to the image. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_dir\fR \fIpath\fR +.sp +\fBadd_dir_early\fP \fIpath\fP .RS 4 -Adds a directory and its parents to the image\&. +Adds a directory and its parents to the early uncompressed image. Works the +same way as \fBadd_dir\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_full_dir\fR \fIdirectory\fR [ \fIglob\fR ] [ \fIstrip_prefix\fR ] +.sp +\fBadd_full_dir\fP \fIdirectory\fP [ \fIglob\fP ] [ \fIstrip_prefix\fP ] .RS 4 -Recursively adds a directory to the image by walking the given path and calling -\fBadd_file\fR, -\fBadd_dir\fR, and -\fBadd_symlink\fR -accordingly\&. This function will not follow symlinks, nor will it add the targets of symlinks\&. +Recursively adds a directory to the image by walking the given path and +calling \fBadd_file\fP, \fBadd_dir\fP, and \fBadd_symlink\fP accordingly. This function +will not follow symlinks, nor will it add the targets of symlinks. -If the -\fIglob\fR -argument is passed, only files and symlinks matching this glob will be added\&. +.br +If the \fIglob\fP argument is passed, only files and symlinks matching this glob +will be added. -If the -\fIstrip_prefix\fR -argument is passed, it will be used to strip the destination path (path in the initramfs image) from the prefix specified by the -\fIstrip_prefix\fR -argument\&. This can be useful when writing rootfs\-overlay hooks\&. +.br +If the \fIstrip_prefix\fP argument is passed, it will be used to strip the +destination path (path in the initramfs image) from the prefix specified by +the \fIstrip_prefix\fP argument. This can be useful when writing rootfs\-overlay +hooks. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_symlink\fR \fIpath\fR [ \fIlink\-target\fR ] +.sp +\fBadd_symlink\fP \fIpath\fP [ \fIlink\-target\fP ] .RS 4 -Adds a symlink to the image at the specified -\fIpath\fR, optionally pointing to the specified -\fIlink\-target\fR\&. If the -\fIlink\-target\fR -is not provided, it is assumed that this symlink exists in the real file system, and the target will be read using -\fBreadlink\fR(1)\&. There is no checking done to ensure that the target of the symlink exists, and symlinks will not be followed recursively\&. +Adds a symlink to the image at the specified \fIpath\fP, optionally pointing to +the specified \fIlink\-target\fP. If the \fIlink\-target\fP is not provided, it is +assumed that this symlink exists in the real file system, and the target +will be read using \fBreadlink\fP(1). There is no checking done to ensure that +the target of the symlink exists, and symlinks will not be followed +recursively. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_all_modules\fR [ \fB\-f\fR \fIfilter\fR ] \fIpattern\fR +.sp +\fBadd_all_modules\fP [ \fB\-f\fP \fIfilter\fP ] \fIpattern\fP .RS 4 -Adds modules to the image, without regard for the autodetect whitelist\&. -\fIpattern\fR -should be a subdirectory within the kernel tree describing a subset of modules to be included\&. Further refinement can be provided via the -\fB\-f\fR -flag with an extended regular expression\&. +Adds modules to the image, without regard for the autodetect whitelist. +\fIpattern\fP should be a subdirectory within the kernel tree describing a +subset of modules to be included. Further refinement can be provided via +the \fB\-f\fP flag with an extended regular expression. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_checked_modules\fR [ \fB\-f\fR \fIfilter\fR ] \fIpattern\fR +.sp +\fBadd_checked_modules\fP [ \fB\-f\fP \fIfilter\fP ] \fIpattern\fP .RS 4 -Similar to -\fBadd_all_modules\fR -with the constraint that only modules matching the whitelist generated by the autodetect hook will be added to the image\&. If the autodetect hook is not present in the image, this function is identical to -\fBadd_all_modules\fR\&. +Similar to \fBadd_all_modules\fP with the constraint that only modules matching +the whitelist generated by the autodetect hook will be added to the image. +If the autodetect hook is not present in the image, this function is +identical to \fBadd_all_modules\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_runscript\fR \fIscriptname\fR +.sp +\fBadd_runscript\fP \fIscriptname\fP .RS 4 -Adds a runtime hook to the image, which is a busybox ash compatible shell script\&. The name of the script is guaranteed to match the name of the hook the script is called from\&. +Adds a runtime hook to the image, which is a busybox ash compatible shell +script. The name of the script is guaranteed to match the name of the hook +the script is called from. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_udev_rule\fR \fIrule\-file\fR +.sp +\fBadd_udev_rule\fP \fIrule\-file\fP .RS 4 -Adds a udev rule to the image\&. Dependencies on binaries will be discovered and added\&. The argument can be a rule file name (discovered from well known udev paths) or an absolute path\&. +Adds a udev rule to the image. Dependencies on binaries will be discovered +and added. The argument can be a rule file name (discovered from well known +udev paths) or an absolute path. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_all_modules_from_symbol\fR \fIsymbol\fR \fIpaths\fR +.sp +\fBadd_all_modules_from_symbol\fP \fIsymbol\fP \fIpaths\fP .RS 4 -Adds modules from the -\fIpaths\fR -directories containing the -\fIsymbol\fR -to the image\&. +Adds modules from the \fIpaths\fP directories containing the \fIsymbol\fP to the +image. .RE -.PP -\fBadd_checked_modules_from_symbol\fR \fIsymbol\fR \fIpaths\fR +.sp +\fBadd_checked_modules_from_symbol\fP \fIsymbol\fP \fIpaths\fP .RS 4 -Similar to -\fBadd_all_modules_from_symbol\fR -with the constraint that only modules matching the whitelist generated by the autodetect hook will be added to the image\&. If the autodetect hook is not present in the image, this function is identical to -\fBadd_all_modules_from_symbol\fR\&. +Similar to \fBadd_all_modules_from_symbol\fP with the constraint that only +modules matching the whitelist generated by the autodetect hook will be +added to the image. If the autodetect hook is not present in the image, this +function is identical to \fBadd_all_modules_from_symbol\fP. .RE +.SH "ABOUT EARLY CPIO" +.sp +mkinitcpio has support for early CPIO. These are uncompressed CPIO archives +prepended to the main compressed CPIO archive. They are used for early loading +CPU microcode or loading ACPI table overrides. +.sp +Install hooks can install files to this archive by adding them to \fI$EARLYROOT\fP. .SH "ABOUT RUNTIME HOOKS" .sp -Runtime hooks added to the image via the \fBadd_runscript\fR function from an install hook are able to provide extra functionality during early userspace\&. Specific functions in these files will run at different times\&. A hook can define one or more of these\&. At each hook point, hooks are run in the order that they are defined in the HOOKS variable, except for cleanup hooks which are run in reverse\&. -.PP -\fBrun_earlyhook\fR +Runtime hooks added to the image via the \fBadd_runscript\fP function from an +install hook are able to provide extra functionality during early userspace. +Specific functions in these files will run at different times. A hook can +define one or more of these. At each hook point, hooks are run in the order +that they are defined in the HOOKS variable, except for cleanup hooks which are +run in reverse. +.sp +\fBrun_earlyhook\fP +.RS 4 +Functions of this name will be run once the API mounts have been setup and +the kernel command line has been parsed. Daemons needed for early userspace +should be started from this hook point. +.RE +.sp +\fBrun_hook\fP .RS 4 -Functions of this name will be run once the API mounts have been setup and the kernel command line has been parsed\&. Daemons needed for early userspace should be started from this hook point\&. +Functions of this name will be run after any early hooks, and after user +defined modules have been installed. This is the most common hook point, and +functionality such as scanning for LVM volumes and mapping encrypted volumes +should be performed here. .RE -.PP -\fBrun_hook\fR +.sp +\fBrun_latehook\fP .RS 4 -Functions of this name will be run after any early hooks, and after user defined modules have been installed\&. This is the most common hook point, and functionality such as scanning for LVM volumes and mapping encrypted volumes should be performed here\&. +Functions of this name will be run after root has been mounted. This is +generally used for further necessary setup in the real root, such as +mounting other system partitions. .RE -.PP -\fBrun_latehook\fR +.sp +\fBrun_cleanuphook\fP .RS 4 -Functions of this name will be run after root has been mounted\&. This is generally used for further necessary setup in the real root, such as mounting other system partitions\&. +Functions of this name are run as late as possible. Any daemons started +from a \fBrun_earlyhook\fP function should be shut down here in preparation for +switching to the real root. .RE -.PP -\fBrun_cleanuphook\fR +.sp +\fBrun_emergencyhook\fP .RS 4 -Functions of this name are run as late as possible\&. Any daemons started from a -\fBrun_earlyhook\fR -function should be shut down here in preparation for switching to the real root\&. +Functions of this name are run before the emergency shell launched in case +of boot failure. For example this allows boot splash screens to terminate +their process, so users will notice the failure. .RE -.PP -\fBrun_emergencyhook\fR +.sp +\fBgetarg\fP \fIargument\fP [ \fIdefault\fP ] .RS 4 -Functions of this name are run before the emergency shell launched in case of boot failure\&. For example this allows boot splash screens to terminate their process, so users will notice the failure\&. +This function can be used in runtime hooks to get an argument from the +kernel cmdline. If \fIargument\fP exists with a value, the value is returned. If +\fIargument\fP exists without a value, \fIy\fP is returned. If \fIargument\fP does not +exist, \fIdefault\fP is returned. If \fIdefault\fP is not specified, nothing is +returned. .RE .SH "ABOUT POST HOOKS" .sp -Post hooks are executables or scripts that get executed after the image has been successfully generated and can be used for further processing (i\&.e\&. signing)\&. They receive the kernel as the first argument, the image as second and optionally the unified kernel image as a third\&. +Post hooks are executables or scripts that get executed after the image has been +successfully generated and can be used for further processing (i.e. signing). +They receive the kernel as the first argument, the image as second and +optionally the unified kernel image as a third. .sp -Note that the first argument will be empty when the mkinitcpio has been invoked with \fB\-k\fR \fInone\fR or \fB\-k\fR \fIversion\fR and the kernel image cannot be found on the file system\&. +Note that the first argument will be empty when the mkinitcpio has been invoked +with \fB\-k\fP \fInone\fP or \fB\-k\fP \fIversion\fP and the kernel image cannot be found on the +file system. .sp The following enviroment variables are passed: -.PP -\fBKERNELVERSION\fR +.sp +\fBKERNELVERSION\fP .RS 4 -Contains the full version of the kernel the image has been built from\&. +Contains the full version of the kernel the image has been built from. .RE -.PP -\fBKERNELDESTINATION\fR +.sp +\fBKERNELDESTINATION\fP .RS 4 -The default location where the kernel should be located for booting\&. This usually is the same as the first argument but might differ if mkinitcpio has not been invoked with -\fB\-k\fR -\fI/boot/*\fR\&. If no kernel image has been found this variable will be empty as well\&. +The default location where the kernel should be located for booting. This +usually is the same as the first argument but might differ if mkinitcpio has +not been invoked with \fB\-k\fP \fI/boot/*\fP. If no kernel image has been found this +variable will be empty as well. .RE .SH "EARLY INIT ENVIRONMENT" .sp -mkinitcpio gives special treatment to certain environment variables passed on the kernel command line: -.PP -\fBbreak\fR[=\fI<premount|postmount>\fR] +mkinitcpio gives special treatment to certain environment variables passed on +the kernel command line: +.sp +\fBbreak\fP[=\fI<premount|postmount>\fP] .RS 4 -If specified, mkinitcpio will start a shell during early init\&. The optional parameter controls when this occurs: when -\fIpremount\fR -or no parameter are specified, the shell will be launched prior to mounting root\&. If -\fIpostmount\fR -is specified, the shell will be launched after mounting root\&. +If specified, mkinitcpio will start a shell during early init. The optional +parameter controls when this occurs: when \fIpremount\fP or no parameter are +specified, the shell will be launched prior to mounting root. If \fIpostmount\fP +is specified, the shell will be launched after mounting root. .RE -.PP -\fBdisablehooks=\fR\fIhooklist\fR +.sp +\fBdisablehooks=\fP\fIhooklist\fP .RS 4 -This is a comma separated list of hooks which will be skipped during early init\&. +This is a comma separated list of hooks which will be skipped during early +init. .RE -.PP -\fBearlymodules=\fR\fImodulelist\fR +.sp +\fBearlymodules=\fP\fImodulelist\fP .RS 4 -This is a comma separated list of modules which will be loaded prior to any others\&. This is generally not needed, and usually points to a configuration or kernel problem\&. +This is a comma separated list of modules which will be loaded prior to any +others. This is generally not needed, and usually points to a configuration +or kernel problem. .RE -.PP -\fBquiet\fR +.sp +\fBquiet\fP .RS 4 -Causes mkinitcpio to output fewer messages during boot\&. Errors will not be suppressed\&. +Causes mkinitcpio to output fewer messages during boot. Errors will not be +suppressed. .RE -.PP -\fBro\fR +.sp +\fBro\fP .RS 4 -Specifies that root should be mounted with readonly permissions\&. This is the default behavior\&. +Specifies that root should be mounted with readonly permissions. This is the +default behavior. .RE -.PP -\fBrw\fR +.sp +\fBrw\fP .RS 4 -Specifies that root should be mounted with readwrite permissions\&. This is generally only useful if your initramfs uses the -\fIfsck\fR -hook\&. +Specifies that root should be mounted with readwrite permissions. This is +generally only useful if your initramfs uses the \fIfsck\fP hook. .RE -.PP -\fBroot=\fR\fIrootdevice\fR -.RS 4 -This variable describes the root partition which early init will mount before passing control to the real init\&. mkinitcpio understands a variety of formats, the most basic of which is the path to the block device, either directly such as -\fI/dev/sda2\fR, or using a udev symlink such as -\fI/dev/disk/by\-label/CorsairF80\-root\fR\&. Support for identification by LABEL or UUID tags are also supported, such as, -\fILABEL=CorsairF80\-root\fR\&. As of util\-linux 2\&.22, PARTUUID and PARTLABEL are also supported\&. Identification via hex encoded major/minor device ID is supported for legacy reasons, but should be avoided as it tends to be fragile\&. +.sp +\fBroot=\fP\fIrootdevice\fP +.RS 4 +This variable describes the root partition which early init will mount +before passing control to the real init. mkinitcpio understands a variety of +formats, the most basic of which is the path to the block device, either +directly such as \fI/dev/sda2\fP, or using a udev symlink such as +\fI/dev/disk/by\-label/CorsairF80\-root\fP. Support for identification by LABEL or +UUID tags are also supported, such as, \fILABEL=CorsairF80\-root\fP. As of +util\-linux 2.22, PARTUUID and PARTLABEL are also supported. Identification +via hex encoded major/minor device ID is supported for legacy reasons, but +should be avoided as it tends to be fragile. .RE -.PP -\fBrootdelay\fR[=\fIseconds\fR] +.sp +\fBrootdelay\fP[=\fIseconds\fP] .RS 4 -Sets the delay, in seconds, that mkinitcpio is willing to wait for the root device to show up, if it is not available immediately\&. This defaults to -\fI10\fR -seconds\&. If an invalid integer is passed, this variable will have no effect\&. +Sets the delay, in seconds, that mkinitcpio is willing to wait for the root +device to show up, if it is not available immediately. This defaults to \fI10\fP +seconds. If an invalid integer is passed, this variable will have no effect. .RE -.PP -\fBrootflags=\fR\fIflaglist\fR +.sp +\fBrootflags=\fP\fIflaglist\fP .RS 4 -A comma\-separated list of flags which will be passed onto the -\fBmount\fR(8) command when mounting the root file system\&. Acceptable values are file system specific\&. +A comma\-separated list of flags which will be passed onto the \fBmount\fP(8) +command when mounting the root file system. Acceptable values are file +system specific. .RE -.PP -\fBrootfstype=\fR\fIfstype\fR +.sp +\fBrootfstype=\fP\fIfstype\fP .RS 4 -Overrides the type of file system being mounted as root\&. This should almost never be needed as -\fBmount\fR(8) usually detects this on its own\&. +Overrides the type of file system being mounted as root. This should almost +never be needed as \fBmount\fP(8) usually detects this on its own. .RE -.PP -\fBrd\&.debug\fR +.sp +\fBrd.debug\fP .RS 4 -Enables shell debug (xtrace)\&. If -\fIrd\&.log\fR -is not also a parameter on the kernel command line, this parameter implies -\fIrd\&.log=console\fR\&. +Enables shell debug (xtrace). If \fIrd.log\fP is not also a parameter on the +kernel command line, this parameter implies \fIrd.log=console\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBrd\&.log\fR[\fI=<console|file|kmsg|all>\fR] -.RS 4 -Enables logging of early userspace messages\&. If specified, the optional parameter describes where this information is logged\&. Multiple options can be -\fBOR\fR\-d together using the pipe (|) character\&. Messages are always logged to the console unless the -\fIquiet\fR -parameter is passed\&. If the optional parameter is not specified, -\fIkmsg|console\fR -is assumed\&. If -\fIrd\&.log\fR -is not present on the kernel command line, no logging will take place\&. -.PP -\fBconsole\fR +.sp +\fBrd.log\fP[\fI=<console|file|kmsg|all>\fP] +.RS 4 +Enables logging of early userspace messages. If specified, the optional +parameter describes where this information is logged. Multiple options can +be \fBOR\fP\-d together using the pipe (|) character. Messages are always +logged to the console unless the \fIquiet\fP parameter is passed. If the +optional parameter is not specified, \fIkmsg|console\fP is assumed. If \fIrd.log\fP +is not present on the kernel command line, no logging will take place. +.br +.sp +\fBconsole\fP .RS 4 -Writes output to -\fI/dev/console\fR\&. +Writes output to \fI/dev/console\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBfile\fR +.sp +\fBfile\fP .RS 4 -Writes output to -\fI/run/initramfs/init\&.log\fR\&. +Writes output to \fI/run/initramfs/init.log\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBkmsg\fR +.sp +\fBkmsg\fP .RS 4 -Writes output to the -\fI/dev/kmsg\fR -device (introduced in Linux 3\&.5)\&. This option is a no\-op if your kernel lacks support for -\fI/dev/kmsg\fR\&. +Writes output to the \fI/dev/kmsg\fP device (introduced in Linux 3.5). This +option is a no\-op if your kernel lacks support for \fI/dev/kmsg\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBall\fR +.sp +\fBall\fP .RS 4 -Writes output to all known log targets\&. +Writes output to all known log targets. .RE .RE .sp -These are only the variables that the core of mkinitcpio honor\&. Additional hooks may look for other environment variables and should be documented by the help output for the hook\&. +These are only the variables that the core of mkinitcpio honor. Additional +hooks may look for other environment variables and should be documented by the +help output for the hook. .SH "REPRODUCIBILITY" .sp -mkinitcpio aims to create reproducible initramfs images by default\&. +mkinitcpio aims to create reproducible initramfs images by default. .sp -This means that two subsequent runs of mkinitcpio should produce two files that are identical at the binary level\&. +This means that two subsequent runs of mkinitcpio should produce two files +that are identical at the binary level. .sp -Timestamps within the initramfs are set to the Unix epoch of 1970\-01\-01\&. +Timestamps within the initramfs are set to the Unix epoch of 1970\-01\-01. .sp -Note that in order for the build to be fully reproducible, the compressor specified (e\&.g\&. gzip, xz) must also produce reproducible archives\&. At the time of writing, as an inexhaustive example, the lzop compressor is incapable of producing reproducible archives due to the insertion of a runtime timestamp\&. +Note that in order for the build to be fully reproducible, the compressor +specified (e.g. gzip, xz) must also produce reproducible archives. At the time +of writing, as an inexhaustive example, the lzop compressor is incapable of +producing reproducible archives due to the insertion of a runtime timestamp. .sp -More information can be found at https://reproducible\-builds\&.org\&. +More information can be found at \c +.URL "https://reproducible\-builds.org" "" "." .SH "FILES" -.PP -\fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.conf\fR +.sp +\fI/etc/mkinitcpio.conf\fP .RS 4 -Default configuration file for mkinitcpio\&. +Default configuration file for mkinitcpio. .RE -.PP -\fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.conf\&.d\fR +.sp +\fI/etc/mkinitcpio.conf.d\fP .RS 4 -Directory containing drop\-in configuration files\&. +Directory containing drop\-in configuration files. .RE -.PP -\fI/etc/mkinitcpio\&.d\fR +.sp +\fI/etc/mkinitcpio.d\fP .RS 4 -Directory containing mkinitcpio presets\&. +Directory containing mkinitcpio presets. .RE -.PP -\fI/etc/initcpio/install\fR, \fI/usr/lib/initcpio/install\fR +.sp +\fI/etc/initcpio/install\fP, \fI/usr/lib/initcpio/install\fP .RS 4 -Search path for build time hooks\&. +Search path for build time hooks. .RE -.PP -\fI/etc/initcpio/hooks\fR, \fI/usr/lib/initcpio/hooks\fR +.sp +\fI/etc/initcpio/hooks\fP, \fI/usr/lib/initcpio/hooks\fP .RS 4 -Search path for early userspace runtime hooks\&. +Search path for early userspace runtime hooks. .RE -.PP -\fI/etc/initcpio/post\fR, \fI/usr/lib/initcpio/post\fR +.sp +\fI/etc/initcpio/post\fP, \fI/usr/lib/initcpio/post\fP .RS 4 -Search path for post generation hooks\&. +Search path for post generation hooks. .RE .SH "EXAMPLES" -.PP -\fBmkinitcpio\fR +.sp +\fBmkinitcpio\fP .RS 4 -Perform a dry\-run\&. This will generate an initial ramdisk but will not write anything\&. Use -\fB\-g\fR -to create the real image\&. +Perform a dry\-run. This will generate an initial ramdisk but will not +write anything. Use \fB\-g\fP to create the real image. .RE -.PP -\fBmkinitcpio \-p linux\fR +.sp +\fBmkinitcpio \-p linux\fP .RS 4 -Create an initial ramdisk based on the -\fIlinux\fR -preset\&. +Create an initial ramdisk based on the \fIlinux\fP preset. .RE -.PP -\fBmkinitcpio \-g /boot/initramfs\-linux\&.img \-k /boot/vmlinuz\-linux\fR +.sp +\fBmkinitcpio \-g /boot/initramfs\-linux.img \-k /boot/vmlinuz\-linux\fP .RS 4 -Create an initial ramdisk for the kernel at /boot/vmlinuz\-linux\&. The resulting image will be written to /boot/initramfs\-linux\&.img\&. +Create an initial ramdisk for the kernel at /boot/vmlinuz\-linux. The +resulting image will be written to /boot/initramfs\-linux.img. .RE -.PP -\fBmkinitcpio \-U /efi/EFI/Linux/systemd\-linux\&.efi\fR +.sp +\fBmkinitcpio \-U /efi/EFI/Linux/systemd\-linux.efi\fP .RS 4 -Create an initial ramdisk for the kernel along with a unified kernel image\&. The resulting executable will be written to -\fI/efi/EFI/Linux/systemd\-linux\&.efi\fR\&. +Create an initial ramdisk for the kernel along with a unified kernel image. +The resulting executable will be written to +\fI/efi/EFI/Linux/systemd\-linux.efi\fP. .RE -.PP -\fBmkinitcpio \-U /efi/EFI/Linux/systemd\-linux\&.efi \-\-microcode /boot/intel\-ucode\&.img \-\-splash /usr/share/systemd/bootctl/splash\-arch\&.bmp\fR +.sp +\fBmkinitcpio \-U /efi/EFI/Linux/systemd\-linux.efi \-\-splash /usr/share/systemd/bootctl/splash\-arch.bmp\fP .RS 4 -Create an initial ramdisk for the kernel and a unified kernel image\&. This also includes the Intel CPU microcode and a splash image which will be used during boot\&. +Create an initial ramdisk for the kernel and a unified kernel image. This +also includes a splash image which will be used during boot. .RE .SH "SEE ALSO" .sp -A more thorough article on configuring mkinitcpio: https://wiki\&.archlinux\&.org/title/mkinitcpio +A more thorough article on configuring mkinitcpio: +.URL "https://wiki.archlinux.org/title/mkinitcpio" "" "" .sp -\fBinitrd\fR(4), \fBlsinitcpio\fR(1), \fBmkinitcpio\&.conf\fR(5), \fBbootparam\fR(7) +\fBinitrd\fP(4), \fBlsinitcpio\fP(1), \fBmkinitcpio.conf\fP(5), \fBbootparam\fP(7) .SH "BUGS" .sp -Upon writing this man page, there were no noticeable bugs present\&. Please visit https://gitlab\&.archlinux\&.org/archlinux/mkinitcpio/mkinitcpio/\-/issues for an up to date list\&. +Upon writing this man page, there were no noticeable bugs present. Please visit +.URL "https://gitlab.archlinux.org/archlinux/mkinitcpio/mkinitcpio/\-/issues" "" "" +for an +up to date list. .SH "AUTHORS" .sp -mkinitcpio is maintained by the Arch Linux community\&. Refer to the \fIAUTHORS\fR file for a full list of contributors\&. +mkinitcpio is maintained by the Arch Linux community. Refer to the \fIAUTHORS\fP +file for a full list of contributors. .SH "COPYRIGHT" .sp -Copyright 🄯 mkinitcpio contributors\&. GPL\-2\&.0\-only\&. +Copyright 🄯 mkinitcpio contributors. GPL\-2.0\-only.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mklost+found.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mklost+found.8 index 54e39f90..03b89355 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/mklost+found.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/mklost+found.8 @@ -2,17 +2,17 @@ .\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License. .\" -.TH MKLOST+FOUND 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH MKLOST+FOUND 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME -mklost+found \- create a lost+found directory on a mounted Linux -second extended file system +mklost+found \- create a lost+found directory on a mounted +ext2/ext3/ext4 file system .SH SYNOPSIS .B mklost+found .SH DESCRIPTION .B mklost+found is used to create a .I lost+found -directory in the current working directory on a Linux second extended +directory in the current working directory on an ext2/ext3/ext4 file system. There is normally a .I lost+found directory in the root directory of each file system. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/modinfo.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/modinfo.8 index 6c1fad93..f7175dc1 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/modinfo.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/modinfo.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: modinfo .\" Author: Jon Masters <jcm@jonmasters.org> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: modinfo .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "MODINFO" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "modinfo" +.TH "MODINFO" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "modinfo" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/modprobe.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/modprobe.8 index b700b9d5..8a286ebb 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/modprobe.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/modprobe.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: modprobe .\" Author: Jon Masters <jcm@jonmasters.org> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: modprobe .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "MODPROBE" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "modprobe" +.TH "MODPROBE" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "modprobe" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/nmbd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/nmbd.8 index bcb57168..b669df31 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/nmbd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/nmbd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: nmbd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "NMBD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "NMBD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered using (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBinetd\fR(8), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/paccache.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/paccache.8 index 02d1b4b9..6d6cd225 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/paccache.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/paccache.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: paccache .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACCACHE" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACCACHE" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacdiff.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacdiff.8 index 3d85259d..730e22ce 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacdiff.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacdiff.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacdiff .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACDIFF" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACDIFF" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclist.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclist.8 index 27bc2e8b..4baa2e75 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclist.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclist.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: paclist .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACLIST" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACLIST" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclog-pkglist.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclog-pkglist.8 index 21a49cc7..0468914a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclog-pkglist.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/paclog-pkglist.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: paclog-pkglist .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACLOG\-PKGLIST" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACLOG\-PKGLIST" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-conf.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-conf.8 index 37f883dc..2d612de3 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-conf.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-conf.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacman-conf .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-02-06 +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 .\" Manual: Pacman Manual -.\" Source: Pacman 6.0.2 +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACMAN\-CONF" "8" "2024\-02\-06" "Pacman 6\&.0\&.2" "Pacman Manual" +.TH "PACMAN\-CONF" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Specify an alternate installation root (default is /)\&. .RE .PP -\fB\-r, \-\-repo\fR <remote> +\fB\-r, \-\-repo\fR <repository> .RS 4 Query options for a specific repository\&. .RE @@ -129,17 +129,6 @@ Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> .sp -1 .IP \(bu 2.3 .\} -Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -.sp -1 -.IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp @@ -222,4 +211,15 @@ Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-db-upgrade.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-db-upgrade.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..affc7ba1 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-db-upgrade.8 @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ +'\" t +.\" Title: pacman-db-upgrade +.\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] +.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 +.\" Manual: Pacman Manual +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 +.\" Language: English +.\" +.TH "PACMAN\-DB\-UPGRADE" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" * Define some portability stuff +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673 +.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html +.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq +.el .ds Aq ' +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" * set default formatting +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" disable hyphenation +.nh +.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only) +.ad l +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE * +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.SH "NAME" +pacman-db-upgrade \- upgrade the local pacman database to a newer format +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.sp +\fIpacman\-db\-upgrade\fR [options] +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.sp +\fIpacman\-db\-upgrade\fR is a script that upgrades the local database used by \fBpacman\fR(8) to a newer format\&. +.sp +Options +.sp +.if n \{\ +.RS 4 +.\} +.nf +*\-h, \e\-\-help*:: +Show the built\-in help message and exit\&. +*\-V, \e\-\-version*:: +Show version information and exit\&. +*\-d, \e\-\-dbpath* <path>:: +Set an alternate database location\&. +*\-r, \e\-\-root* <path>:: +Set an alternate installation root\&. +*\e\-\-config* <path>:: +Set an alternate configuration file\&. +*\e\-\-nocolor*:: +Remove color from output\&. + +See Also +.fi +.if n \{\ +.RE +.\} +.sp +\fBpacman\fR(8) +.sp +See the pacman website at https://archlinux\&.org/pacman/ for current information on pacman and its related tools\&. +.SH "BUGS" +.sp +Bugs? You must be kidding; there are no bugs in this software\&. But if we happen to be wrong, submit a bug report with as much detail as possible at the Arch Linux Bug Tracker in the Pacman section\&. +.SH "AUTHORS" +.sp +Current maintainers: +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Allan McRae <allan@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +Past major contributors: +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Dan McGee <dan@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Xavier Chantry <shiningxc@gmail\&.com> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-key.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-key.8 index 0940c667..a526378d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-key.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman-key.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacman-key .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-02-06 +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 .\" Manual: Pacman Manual -.\" Source: Pacman 6.0.2 +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACMAN\-KEY" "8" "2024\-02\-06" "Pacman 6\&.0\&.2" "Pacman Manual" +.TH "PACMAN\-KEY" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -225,17 +225,6 @@ Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> .sp -1 .IP \(bu 2.3 .\} -Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -.sp -1 -.IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp @@ -318,4 +307,15 @@ Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman.8 index 3e4b514d..ab44e9ea 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacman.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacman .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-02-06 +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 .\" Manual: Pacman Manual -.\" Source: Pacman 6.0.2 +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACMAN" "8" "2024\-02\-06" "Pacman 6\&.0\&.2" "Pacman Manual" +.TH "PACMAN" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -250,7 +250,8 @@ Disable defaults for low speed limit and timeout on downloads\&. Use this if you .PP \fB\-\-sysroot\fR <dir> .RS 4 -Specify an alternative system root\&. Pacman will chroot and chdir into the system root prior to running\&. This allows mounted guest systems to be properly operated on\&. Any other paths given will be interpreted as relative to the system root\&. Requires root privileges\&. +Specify an alternative system root\&. This path will be prepended to all other configuration directories and any repository servers beginning with +file://\&. Any paths or URLs passed as targets will not be modified\&. This allows mounted guest systems to be properly operated on\&. .RE .SH "TRANSACTION OPTIONS (APPLY TO \FI\-S\FR, \FI\-R\FR AND \FI\-U\FR)" .PP @@ -261,7 +262,7 @@ Skips dependency version checks\&. Package names are still checked\&. Normally, .PP \fB\-\-assume\-installed\fR <package=version> .RS 4 -Add a virtual package "package" with version "version" to the transaction to satisfy dependencies\&. This allows to disable specific dependency checks without affecting all dependency checks\&. To disable all dependency checking, see the +Add a virtual package "package" with version "version" to the transaction to satisfy dependencies\&. This allows disabling the specific dependency checks without affecting all dependency checks\&. To disable all dependency checking, see the \fI\-\-nodeps\fR option\&. .RE @@ -295,7 +296,7 @@ to specify how targets are displayed\&. The default format string is "%l", which .RS 4 Specify a printf\-like format to control the output of the \fI\-\-print\fR -operation\&. The possible attributes are: "%n" for pkgname, "%v" for pkgver, "%l" for location, "%r" for repository, and "%s" for size\&. Implies +operation\&. The possible attributes are: "%a" for arch, "%b" for builddate, "%d" for description, "%e" for pkgbase, "%f" for filename, "%g" for base64 encoded PGP signature, "%h" for sha256sum, "%m" for md5sum, "%n" for pkgname, "%p" for packager, "%v" for pkgver, "%l" for location, "%r" for repository, "%s" for size, "%C" for checkdepends, "%D" for depends, "%G" for groups, "%H" for conflicts, "%L" for licenses, "%M" for makedepends, "%O" for optional depends, "%P" for provides and "%R" for replaces\&. Implies \fI\-\-print\fR\&. .RE .SH "UPGRADE OPTIONS (APPLY TO \FI\-S\FR AND \FI\-U\FR)" @@ -518,7 +519,9 @@ will do a system upgrade and install/upgrade the "foo" package in the same opera .PP \fB\-y, \-\-refresh\fR .RS 4 -Download a fresh copy of the master package database from the server(s) defined in +Download a fresh copy of the master package databases +\fI(repo\&.db)\fR +from the server(s) defined in \fBpacman.conf\fR(5)\&. This should typically be used each time you use \fI\-\-sysupgrade\fR or @@ -553,7 +556,9 @@ Suppress messages on successful completion of database operations\&. .PP \fB\-y, \-\-refresh\fR .RS 4 -Download fresh package databases from the server\&. Use twice to force a refresh even if databases are up to date\&. +Download fresh package file databases +\fI(repo\&.files)\fR +from the server\&. Use twice to force a refresh even if databases are up to date\&. .RE .PP \fB\-l, \-\-list\fR @@ -691,17 +696,6 @@ Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> .sp -1 .IP \(bu 2.3 .\} -Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -.sp -1 -.IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp @@ -784,4 +778,15 @@ Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacscripts.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacscripts.8 index e839ed55..348cf3aa 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacscripts.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacscripts.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacscripts .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACSCRIPTS" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACSCRIPTS" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsearch.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsearch.8 index 53351748..012a57ed 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsearch.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsearch.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacsearch .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACSEARCH" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACSEARCH" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsort.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsort.8 index 451376b4..3df437d5 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsort.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pacsort.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pacsort .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACSORT" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACSORT" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pactree.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pactree.8 index e8186546..a17fe3a9 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pactree.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pactree.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pactree .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PACTREE" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "PACTREE" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pam_winbind.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pam_winbind.8 index da871a7a..80abeb0c 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pam_winbind.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pam_winbind.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pam_winbind .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: 8 -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PAM_WINBIND" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "8" +.TH "PAM_WINBIND" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "8" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ This is the profile path set in the profile tab in the user settings\&. Normally \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of Samba\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of Samba\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pcilmr.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pcilmr.8 index 1fa87720..9ff22464 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pcilmr.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pcilmr.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH PCILMR 8 "25 February 2024" "pciutils-3.11.1" "The PCI Utilities" +.TH PCILMR 8 "05 April 2024" "pciutils-3.12.0" "The PCI Utilities" .SH NAME pcilmr \- margin PCIe Links .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pdbedit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pdbedit.8 index 25112fb9..e3758b83 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/pdbedit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/pdbedit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: pdbedit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ Prints the program version number\&. This command may be used only by root\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/rankmirrors.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/rankmirrors.8 index 7835aceb..4fd8c7e7 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/rankmirrors.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/rankmirrors.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: rankmirrors .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "RANKMIRRORS" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "RANKMIRRORS" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/repo-add.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/repo-add.8 index 9d2df918..4cb50a57 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/repo-add.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/repo-add.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: repo-add .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-02-06 +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 .\" Manual: Pacman Manual -.\" Source: Pacman 6.0.2 +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "REPO\-ADD" "8" "2024\-02\-06" "Pacman 6\&.0\&.2" "Pacman Manual" +.TH "REPO\-ADD" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -88,6 +88,11 @@ Only add packages that are not already in the database\&. Warnings will be print .RS 4 Remove old package files from the disk when updating their entry in the database\&. .RE +.PP +\fB\-\-include\-sigs\fR +.RS 4 +Include package PGP signatures in the repository database (if available) +.RE .SH "EXAMPLE" .sp \fIrepo\-add\fR foo\&.db\&.tar\&.xz <pkg1> [<pkg2> \&...] @@ -135,17 +140,6 @@ Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> .sp -1 .IP \(bu 2.3 .\} -Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -.sp -1 -.IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp @@ -228,4 +222,15 @@ Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/resize2fs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/resize2fs.8 index 52c9e848..7766c5d3 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/resize2fs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/resize2fs.8 @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ .\" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1997 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved. .\" -.\" .TH RESIZE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" -.TH RESIZE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.\" .TH RESIZE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" +.TH RESIZE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME resize2fs \- ext2/ext3/ext4 file system resizer .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/rmmod.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/rmmod.8 index 3700ec0a..026d2608 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/rmmod.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/rmmod.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: rmmod .\" Author: Jon Masters <jcm@jonmasters.org> .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/09/2023 +.\" Date: 03/05/2024 .\" Manual: rmmod .\" Source: kmod .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "RMMOD" "8" "02/09/2023" "kmod" "rmmod" +.TH "RMMOD" "8" "03/05/2024" "kmod" "rmmod" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-bgqd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-bgqd.8 index b63971e1..d6086567 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-bgqd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-bgqd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-bgqd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-BGQD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-BGQD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 index 88b703df..68f4aaa7 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-dcerpcd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-DCERPCD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-DCERPCD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ .\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE * .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .SH "NAME" -samba-dcerpcd \- This is one of Samba\*(Aqs DCERPC server processes that can listen on sockets where RPC services are offered and is the parent process of the DCERPC services it invokes\&. Unless separately invoked it is started on demand from smbd or winbind and serves DCERPC only over named pipes (np) as a helper process\&. This will be the standard setup for most installations (standalone/member server/AD server) unless they modify their startup scripts\&. Note in when Samba is configured as an Active Directory Domain controller the samba process that invokes smbd will still provide its normal DCERPC services, not samba\-dcerpcd\&. When separately invoked by system startup scripts or a a daemon, the global smb\&.conf option \m[blue]\fBrpc start on demand helpers = false\fR\m[] MUST be set to allow samba\-dcerpcd to start standalone\&. +samba-dcerpcd \- This is one of Samba\*(Aqs DCERPC server processes that can listen on sockets where RPC services are offered and is the parent process of the DCERPC services it invokes\&. Unless separately invoked it is started on demand from smbd or winbind and serves DCERPC only over named pipes (np) as a helper process\&. This will be the standard setup for most installations (standalone/member server/AD server) unless they modify their startup scripts\&. Note in when Samba is configured as an Active Directory Domain controller the samba process that invokes smbd will still provide its normal DCERPC services, not samba\-dcerpcd\&. When separately invoked by system startup scripts or a daemon, the global smb\&.conf option \m[blue]\fBrpc start on demand helpers = false\fR\m[] MUST be set to allow samba\-dcerpcd to start standalone\&. .SH "SYNOPSIS" .HP \w'\ 'u samba\-dcerpcd [\-D|\-\-daemon] [\-i|\-\-interactive] [\-F|\-\-foreground] [\-\-no\-process\-group] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-\-debug\-stdout] [\-\-configfile=<configuration\ file>] [\-\-option=<name>=<value>] [\-\-leak\-report] [\-\-leak\-report\-full] [\-V|\-\-version] [\-\-libexec\-rpcds] [\-\-np\-helper] [\-\-ready\-signal\-fd=<fd>] [<SERVICE_1>] [<SERVICE_2>] [<\&.\&.\&.>] diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-regedit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-regedit.8 index 373487d3..dd5dbae9 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-regedit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-regedit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-regedit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-REGEDIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-REGEDIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ In case you need more fine grained control you can use: .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBsmbd\fR(8), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-tool.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-tool.8 index 2a41f66a..45577459 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-tool.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba-tool.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-tool .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-TOOL" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-TOOL" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ DN of alternative location (with or without domainDN counterpart) to default CN= .PP \-\-description=DESCRIPTION .RS 4 -The new computers\*(Aqs description\&. +The new computer\*(Aqs description\&. .RE .PP \-\-ip\-address=IP_ADDRESS_LIST @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ DN of alternative location (with or without domainDN counterpart) in which the n .PP \-\-description=DESCRIPTION .RS 4 -The new contacts\*(Aqs description\&. +The new contact\*(Aqs description\&. .RE .PP \-\-surname=SURNAME @@ -585,106 +585,156 @@ Cannot be used together with \-\-audit\&. Strong NTLM Policy (Disabled, Optional, Required)\&. .RE .PP -\-\-user\-tgt\-lifetime +\-\-user\-tgt\-lifetime\-mins .RS 4 Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for user accounts\&. .RE .PP \-\-user\-allow\-ntlm\-auth .RS 4 -Allow NTLM network authentication when user is restricted to selected devices\&. +Allow +\fBNTLM\fR +and +\fB Interactive NETLOGON SamLogon\fR +authentication despite the fact that +\fBallowed\-to\-authenticate\-from\fR +is in use, which would otherwise restrict the user to selected devices\&. .RE .PP -\-\-service\-tgt\-lifetime +\-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from .RS 4 -Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for service accounts\&. +Conditions a device must meet for users covered by this policy to be allowed to authenticate\&. While this is a restriction on the device, any conditional ACE rules are expressed as if the device was a user\&. +.sp +Must be a valid SDDL string without reference to Device keywords\&. +.sp +Example: O:SYG:SYD:(XA;OICI;CR;;;WD;(Member_of {SID(AU)})) .RE .PP -\-\-service\-allow\-ntlm\-auth +\-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from\-silo .RS 4 -Allow NTLM network authentication when service is restricted to selected devices\&. +User is allowed to authenticate, if the device they authenticate from is assigned and granted membership of a given silo\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from .RE .PP -\-\-computer\-tgt\-lifetime +\-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to=SDDL .RS 4 -Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for computer accounts\&. +This policy, applying to a user account that is offering a service, eg a web server with a user account, restricts which accounts may access it\&. +.sp +Must be a valid SDDL string\&. The SDDL can reference both bare (user) and Device conditions\&. +.sp +SDDL Example: +\fBO:SYG:SYD:(XA;OICI;CR;;;WD;(Member_of {SID(AO)}))\fR .RE -.SS "domain auth policy modify" .PP -Modify authentication policies on the domain\&. +\-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to\-by\-group=GROUP +.RS 4 +The user account, offering a network service, covered by this policy, will only be allowed access from other accounts that are members of the given +\fBGROUP\fR\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to +.RE .PP -\-H, \-\-URL +\-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to\-by\-silo=SILO .RS 4 -LDB URL for database or target server\&. +The user account, offering a network service, covered by this policy, will only be allowed access from other accounts that are assigned to, granted membership of (and meet any authentication conditions of) the given SILO\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-user\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to .RE .PP -\-\-name +\-\-service\-tgt\-lifetime\-mins .RS 4 -Name of the authentication policy (required)\&. +Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for service accounts\&. .RE .PP -\-\-description +\-\-service\-allow\-ntlm\-auth .RS 4 -Optional description for the authentication policy\&. +Allow NTLM network authentication when service is restricted to selected devices\&. .RE .PP -\-\-protect +\-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from .RS 4 -Protect authentication policy from accidental deletion\&. +Conditions a device must meet for service accounts covered by this policy to be allowed to authenticate\&. While this is a restriction on the device, any conditional ACE rules are expressed as if the device was a user\&. .sp -Cannot be used together with \-\-unprotect\&. +Must be a valid SDDL string without reference to Device keywords\&. +.sp +SDDL Example: +\fBO:SYG:SYD:(XA;OICI;CR;;;WD;(Member_of {SID(AU)}))\fR .RE .PP -\-\-unprotect +\-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from\-device\-silo=SILO .RS 4 -Unprotect authentication policy from accidental deletion\&. +The service account (eg a Managed Service Account, Group Managed Service Account) is allowed to authenticate, if the device it authenticates from is assigned and granted membership of a given +\fBSILO\fR\&. .sp -Cannot be used together with \-\-protect\&. +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from .RE .PP -\-\-audit +\-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from\-device\-group=GROUP .RS 4 -Only audit authentication policy\&. +The service account (eg a Managed Service Account, Group Managed Service Account) is allowed to authenticate, if the device it authenticates from is a member of the given +\fBgroup\fR\&. .sp -Cannot be used together with \-\-enforce\&. +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-from .RE .PP -\-\-enforce +\-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to=SDDL .RS 4 -Enforce authentication policy\&. +This policy, applying to a service account (eg a Managed Service Account, Group Managed Service Account), restricts which accounts may access it\&. .sp -Cannot be used together with \-\-audit\&. +Must be a valid SDDL string\&. The SDDL can reference both bare (user) and Device conditions\&. +.sp +SDDL Example: +\fBO:SYG:SYD:(XA;OICI;CR;;;WD;(Member_of {SID(AO)}))\fR .RE .PP -\-\-strong\-ntlm\-policy +\-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to\-by\-group=GROUP .RS 4 -Strong NTLM Policy (Disabled, Optional, Required)\&. +The service account (eg a Managed Service Account, Group Managed Service Account), will only be allowed access by other accounts that are members of the given +\fBGROUP\fR\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to .RE .PP -\-\-user\-tgt\-lifetime +\-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to\-by\-silo=SILO .RS 4 -Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for user accounts\&. +The service account (eg a Managed Service Account, Group Managed Service Account), will only be allowed access by other accounts that are assigned to, granted membership of (and meet any authentication conditions of) the given SILO\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-service\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to .RE .PP -\-\-user\-allow\-ntlm\-auth +\-\-computer\-tgt\-lifetime\-mins .RS 4 -Allow NTLM network authentication when user is restricted to selected devices\&. +Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for computer accounts\&. .RE .PP -\-\-service\-tgt\-lifetime +\-\-computer\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to=SDDL .RS 4 -Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for service accounts\&. +This policy, applying to a computer account (eg a server or workstation), restricts which accounts may access it\&. +.sp +Must be a valid SDDL string\&. The SDDL can reference both bare (user) and Device conditions\&. +.sp +SDDL Example: O:SYG:SYD:(XA;OICI;CR;;;WD;(Member_of {SID(AO)})) .RE .PP -\-\-service\-allow\-ntlm\-auth +\-\-computer\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to\-by\-group=GROUP .RS 4 -Allow NTLM network authentication when service is restricted to selected devices\&. +The computer account (eg a server or workstation), will only be allowed access by other accounts that are members of the given +\fBGROUP\fR\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-computer\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to .RE .PP -\-\-computer\-tgt\-lifetime +\-\-computer\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to\-by\-silo=SILO .RS 4 -Ticket\-Granting\-Ticket lifetime for computer accounts\&. +The computer account (eg a server or workstation), will only be allowed access by other accounts that are assigned to, granted membership of (and meet any authentication conditions of) the given SILO\&. +.sp +This attribute avoids the need to write SDDL by hand and cannot be used with \-\-computer\-allowed\-to\-authenticate\-to .RE +.SS "domain auth policy modify" +.PP +Modify authentication policies on the domain\&. The same options apply as for +\fBdomain auth policy create\fR\&. .SS "domain auth policy delete" .PP Delete authentication policies on the domain\&. @@ -748,24 +798,19 @@ Name of the authentication silo (required)\&. Optional description for the authentication silo\&. .RE .PP -\-\-policy -.RS 4 -Use single policy for all principals in this silo\&. -.RE -.PP -\-\-user\-policy +\-\-user\-authentication\-policy .RS 4 -User account policy\&. +User account authentication policy\&. .RE .PP -\-\-service\-policy +\-\-service\-authentication\-policy .RS 4 -Managed Service Account policy\&. +Managed service account authentication policy\&. .RE .PP -\-\-computer\-policy +\-\-computer\-authentication\-policy .RS 4 -Computer Account policy\&. +Computer authentication policy\&. .RE .PP \-\-protect @@ -814,24 +859,19 @@ Name of the authentication silo (required)\&. Optional description for the authentication silo\&. .RE .PP -\-\-policy +\-\-user\-authentication\-policy .RS 4 -Use single policy for all principals in this silo\&. +User account authentication policy\&. .RE .PP -\-\-user\-policy +\-\-service\-authentication\-policy .RS 4 -User account policy\&. +Managed service account authentication policy\&. .RE .PP -\-\-service\-policy +\-\-computer\-authentication\-policy .RS 4 -Managed Service Account policy\&. -.RE -.PP -\-\-computer\-policy -.RS 4 -Computer Account policy\&. +Computer authentication policy\&. .RE .PP \-\-protect @@ -879,9 +919,9 @@ Name of authentication silo to delete (required)\&. .RS 4 Force authentication silo delete even if it is protected\&. .RE -.SS "domain auth silo member add" +.SS "domain auth silo member grant" .PP -Add a member to an authentication silo\&. +Grant a member access to an authentication silo\&. .PP \-H, \-\-URL .RS 4 @@ -895,7 +935,7 @@ Name of authentication silo (required)\&. .PP \-\-member .RS 4 -Member to add to the silo (DN or account name)\&. +Member to grant access to the silo (DN or account name)\&. .RE .SS "domain auth silo member list" .PP @@ -915,9 +955,9 @@ Name of authentication silo (required)\&. .RS 4 View members as JSON instead of a list\&. .RE -.SS "domain auth silo member remove" +.SS "domain auth silo member revoke" .PP -Remove a member from an authentication silo\&. +Revoke a member from an authentication silo\&. .PP \-H, \-\-URL .RS 4 @@ -931,7 +971,7 @@ Name of authentication silo (required)\&. .PP \-\-member .RS 4 -Member to remove from the silo (DN or account name)\&. +Member to revoke from the silo (DN or account name)\&. .RE .SS "domain claim claim-type list" .PP @@ -1596,6 +1636,17 @@ Show objectclasses that MAY or MUST contain this attribute\&. .SS "schema objectclass show objectclass [options]" .PP Display an objectclass schema definition\&. +.SS "shell" +.PP +Opens an interactive Samba Python shell\&. +.SS "shell [options]" +.PP +Opens an interactive Python shell for Samba ldb connection\&. +.PP +\-H, \-\-URL +.RS 4 +LDB URL for database or target server\&. +.RE .SS "sites" .PP Manage sites\&. @@ -1799,11 +1850,42 @@ This command unlocks a user account in the Active Directory domain\&. .SS "user getpassword username [options]" .PP Gets the password of a user account\&. +.SS "user get-kerberos-ticket username [options]" +.PP +Gets a Kerberos Ticket Granting Ticket as the account\&. .SS "user syncpasswords --cache-ldb-initialize [options]" .PP Syncs the passwords of all user accounts, using an optional script\&. .PP Note that this command should run on a single domain controller only (typically the PDC\-emulator)\&. +.SS "user auth policy assign username [options]" +.PP +Set assigned authentication policy for user\&. +.PP +\-\-policy +.RS 4 +Name of authentication policy to assign or leave empty to remove\&. +.RE +.SS "user auth policy remove username" +.PP +Remove assigned authentication policy from user\&. +.SS "user auth policy view username" +.PP +View the assigned authentication policy for user\&. +.SS "user auth silo assign username [options]" +.PP +Set assigned authentication silo for user\&. +.PP +\-\-silo +.RS 4 +Name of authentication silo to assign or leave empty to remove\&. +.RE +.SS "user auth silo remove username" +.PP +Remove assigned authentication silo from user\&. +.SS "user auth silo view username" +.PP +View the assigned authentication silo for user\&. .SS "vampire [options] \fIdomain\fR" .PP Join and synchronise a remote AD domain to the local server\&. Please note that @@ -1869,7 +1951,7 @@ because the repsFrom/To objects are not replicated, and it can reveal replicatio Gives usage information\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is complete for version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is complete for version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba.8 index 1e411e43..b1866842 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used b Most messages are reasonably self\-explanatory\&. Unfortunately, at the time this man page was created, there are too many diagnostics available in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic\&. At this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the diagnostics you are seeing\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBhosts_access\fR(5) diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba_downgrade_db.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba_downgrade_db.8 index f24edaa2..ab5c94c0 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba_downgrade_db.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/samba_downgrade_db.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba_downgrade_db .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA_DOWNGRADE_DB" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "User Commands" +.TH "SAMBA_DOWNGRADE_DB" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "User Commands" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ The format of the Samba Active Directory (AD) database changed in version 4\&.8 \fIbefore\fR the Samba packages can be safely downgraded\&. .PP -This tool downgrades a Samba sam\&.ldb database from the format used in version 4\&.19\&.5 to that of version 4\&.7\&. The v4\&.7 database format can safely be read by any version of Samba\&. If necessary, later versions of Samba will repack and reconfigure a v4\&.7\-format database when the samba executable is first started\&. +This tool downgrades a Samba sam\&.ldb database from the format used in version 4\&.20\&.1 to that of version 4\&.7\&. The v4\&.7 database format can safely be read by any version of Samba\&. If necessary, later versions of Samba will repack and reconfigure a v4\&.7\-format database when the samba executable is first started\&. .PP Note that all Samba services must be stopped on the DC before running this tool\&. Once the tool has run, do not restart samba or modify the database before the Samba software package has been downgraded\&. .SH "OPTIONS" @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Link directly to smb\&.conf file instead of system default (usually in /usr/loca .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is complete for version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is complete for version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/setpci.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/setpci.8 index d32e779c..915ce275 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/setpci.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/setpci.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH setpci 8 "25 February 2024" "pciutils-3.11.1" "The PCI Utilities" +.TH setpci 8 "05 April 2024" "pciutils-3.12.0" "The PCI Utilities" .SH NAME setpci \- configure PCI devices .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/sln.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/sln.8 index 30d5177f..d375cdaf 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/sln.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/sln.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" .\" SPDX-License-Identifier: Linux-man-pages-copyleft .\" -.TH sln 8 2023-10-31 "Linux man-pages 6.06" +.TH sln 8 2024-05-02 "Linux man-pages 6.8" .SH NAME sln \- create symbolic links .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbd.8 index d72b67d2..74b2a2b6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SMBD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ parameter\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "DIAGNOSTICS" .PP Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbpasswd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbpasswd.8 index 37fa987f..d943efc3 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbpasswd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbpasswd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbpasswd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd\&. In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba has been set up to use encrypted passwords\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbspool_krb5_wrapper.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbspool_krb5_wrapper.8 index 7e5897c4..017f6584 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbspool_krb5_wrapper.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/smbspool_krb5_wrapper.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbspool_krb5_wrapper .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBSPOOL_KRB5_WRAPPE" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "SMBSPOOL_KRB5_WRAPPE" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ss.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ss.8 index 073e9f03..e23af826 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/ss.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/ss.8 @@ -24,6 +24,9 @@ Output version information. .B \-H, \-\-no-header Suppress header line. .TP +.B \-Q, \-\-no-queues +Suppress sending and receiving queue columns. +.TP .B \-O, \-\-oneline Print each socket's data on a single line. .TP @@ -40,6 +43,10 @@ established connections) sockets. .B \-l, \-\-listening Display only listening sockets (these are omitted by default). .TP +.B \-B, \-\-bound-inactive +Display only TCP bound but inactive (not listening, connecting, etc.) sockets +(these are omitted by default). +.TP .B \-o, \-\-options Show timer information. For TCP protocol, the output format is: .RS @@ -419,6 +426,12 @@ to FILE after applying filters. If FILE is - stdout is used. Read filter information from FILE. Each line of FILE is interpreted like single command line option. If FILE is - stdin is used. .TP +.B \-\-bpf-maps +Pretty-print all the BPF socket-local data entries for each socket. +.TP +.B \-\-bpf-map-id=MAP_ID +Pretty-print the BPF socket-local data entries for the requested map ID. Can be used more than once. +.TP .B FILTER := [ state STATE-FILTER ] [ EXPRESSION ] Please take a look at the official documentation for details regarding filters. @@ -456,6 +469,9 @@ states except for - opposite to .B bucket +.B bound-inactive +- bound but otherwise inactive sockets (not listening, connecting, etc.) + .SH EXPRESSION .B EXPRESSION diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bless-boot.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bless-boot.service.8 index fc71f4cb..794247be 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bless-boot.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bless-boot.service.8 @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ style boot counting is used\&. Internally, the service operates based on the \fILoaderBootCountPath\fR EFI variable (of the vendor UUID -\fB4a67b082\-0a4c\-41cf\-b6c7\-440b29bb8c4\fR), which is passed from the boot loader to the OS\&. It contains a file system path (relative to the EFI system partition) of the +\fB4a67b082\-0a4c\-41cf\-b6c7\-440b29bb8c4f\fR), which is passed from the boot loader to the OS\&. It contains a file system path (relative to the EFI system partition) of the \m[blue]\fBBoot Loader Specification\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2 compliant boot loader entry file or unified kernel image file that was used to boot up the system\&. \fBsystemd\-bless\-boot\&.service\fR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bsod.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bsod.service.8 index 0c1fc877..cd820d5b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bsod.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-bsod.service.8 @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ .\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE * .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .SH "NAME" -systemd-bsod.service, systemd-bsod \- Displays boot\-time emergency log message in full screen\&. +systemd-bsod.service, systemd-bsod \- Displays boot\-time emergency log message in full screen .SH "SYNOPSIS" .PP systemd\-bsod\&.service diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-cryptsetup.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-cryptsetup.8 index cfa85bc0..17c7206f 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-cryptsetup.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-cryptsetup.8 @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ is used to set up (with systemd\-cryptsetup@\&.service during early boot, but may also be be called manually\&. The positional arguments \fIVOLUME\fR, -\fISOURCEDEVICE\fR, +\fISOURCE\-DEVICE\fR, \fIKEY\-FILE\fR, and \fICRYPTTAB\-OPTIONS\fR have the same meaning as the fields in diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume-generator.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume-generator.8 index 21c57e3f..8484513a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume-generator.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume-generator.8 @@ -27,12 +27,13 @@ systemd-hibernate-resume-generator \- Unit generator for resume= kernel paramete .SH "DESCRIPTION" .PP \fBsystemd\-hibernate\-resume\-generator\fR -is a generator that initiates the procedure to resume the system from hibernation\&. It creates the -\fBsystemd-hibernate-resume.service\fR(8) -unit according to the value of +is a generator that initiates the procedure to resume the system from hibernation\&. When \fBresume=\fR -parameter specified on the kernel command line, or the value of EFI variable -\fIHibernateLocation\fR, which will instruct the kernel to resume the system from the hibernation image on that device\&. +kernel command line option or +\fIHibernateLocation\fR +EFI variable is detected, it enables the +\fBsystemd-hibernate-resume.service\fR(8) +unit, which will instruct the kernel to resume the system from the hibernation image\&. .SH "KERNEL COMMAND LINE" .PP systemd\-hibernate\-resume\-generator diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume.service.8 index 9117af69..f5b1b7a1 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-hibernate-resume.service.8 @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ initiates the resume from hibernation\&. .PP \fBsystemd\-hibernate\-resume\fR only supports the in\-kernel hibernation implementation, see -\m[blue]\fBSwap suspend\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2\&. Internally, it works by writing the major:minor of specified device node to +\m[blue]\fBSwap suspend\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2\&. Internally, it works by writing the major:minor of selected device node to /sys/power/resume, along with the offset in memory pages (/sys/power/resume_offset) if supported\&. .PP Failing to initiate a resume is not an error condition\&. It may mean that there was no resume image (e\&. g\&. if the system has been simply powered off and not hibernated)\&. In such cases, the boot is ordinarily continued\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-journald.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-journald.service.8 index 029e419d..58c564ca 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-journald.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-journald.service.8 @@ -285,6 +285,15 @@ for information about these settings\&. Added in version 186\&. .RE .PP +\fIsystemd\&.journald\&.max_level_store=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.journald\&.max_level_syslog=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.journald\&.max_level_kmsg=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.journald\&.max_level_console=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.journald\&.max_level_wall=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.journald\&.max_level_socket=\fR +.RS 4 +Controls the maximum log level of messages that are stored in the journal, forwarded to syslog, kmsg, the console, the wall, or a socket\&. This kernel command line options override the settings of the same names in the +\fBjournald.conf\fR(5) +file\&. +.sp +Added in version 232\&. +.RE +.PP Note that these kernel command line options are only honoured by the default namespace, see above\&. .SH "ACCESS CONTROL" .PP diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrlock.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrlock.8 index b3206f6b..a983ad68 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrlock.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrlock.8 @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Added in version 255\&. \fBcel\fR .RS 4 This reads the combined TPM2 event log and writes it to STDOUT in -\m[blue]\fBTCG Common Event Log Format (CEL\-JSON)\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2 +\m[blue]\fBTCG Canonical Event Log Format (CEL\-JSON)\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2 format\&. .sp Added in version 255\&. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Generates/removes a \&.pcrlock file based on raw binary data\&. The data is either read from the specified file or from STDIN (if none is specified)\&. This requires that \fB\-\-pcrs=\fR -is specified\&. The generated pcrlock file is written to the file specified via +is specified\&. The generated \&.pcrlock file is written to the file specified via \fB\-\-pcrlock=\fR or to STDOUT (if none is specified)\&. .sp @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Added in version 255\&. .PP \fB\-\-nv\-index=\fR .RS 4 -Specifies to NV index to store the policy in\&. Honoured by +Specifies the NV index to store the policy in\&. Honoured by \fBmake\-policy\fR\&. If not specified the command will automatically pick a free NV index\&. .sp Added in version 255\&. @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ On success, 0 is returned, a non\-zero failure code otherwise\&. \fBsystemd-pcrmachine.service\fR(8) .SH "NOTES" .IP " 1." 4 -TCG Common Event Log Format (CEL-JSON) +TCG Canonical Event Log Format (CEL-JSON) .RS 4 \%https://trustedcomputinggroup.org/resource/canonical-event-log-format/ .RE diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrphase.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrphase.service.8 index 38f7e40c..8cd1d2f3 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrphase.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-pcrphase.service.8 @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Measurements are logged into an event log file maintained in /run/log/systemd/tpm2\-measure\&.log, which contains a \m[blue]\fBJSON\-SEQ\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2 series of objects that follow the general structure of the -\m[blue]\fBTCG Common Event Log Format (CEL\-JSON)\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[2]\d\s+2 +\m[blue]\fBTCG Canonical Event Log Format (CEL\-JSON)\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[2]\d\s+2 event objects (but lack the "recnum" field)\&. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ JSON-SEQ \%https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc7464.html .RE .IP " 2." 4 -TCG Common Event Log Format (CEL-JSON) +TCG Canonical Event Log Format (CEL-JSON) .RS 4 \%https://trustedcomputinggroup.org/resource/canonical-event-log-format/ .RE diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-poweroff.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-poweroff.service.8 index b7a3d813..52f8f64a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-poweroff.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-poweroff.service.8 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ and pass one arguments to them: either "reboot", or "kexec", depending on the chosen action\&. All executables in this directory are executed in parallel, and execution of the action is not continued before all executables finished\&. Note that these executables are run \fIafter\fR -all services have been shut down, and after most mounts have been detached (the root file system as well as +all services have been shut down, and after most mounts have been unmounted (the root file system as well as /run/ and various API file systems are still around though)\&. This means any programs dropped into this directory must be prepared to run in such a limited execution environment and not rely on external services or hierarchies such as /var/ diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-repart.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-repart.8 index b873a9f5..3a6e8051 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-repart.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-repart.8 @@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ On success, 0 is returned, a non\-zero failure code otherwise\&. .PP The following creates a configuration extension DDI (confext) for an /etc/motd -update\&. +update: .sp .if n \{\ .RS 4 diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-socket-proxyd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-socket-proxyd.8 index ef77126a..e7057e71 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-socket-proxyd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-socket-proxyd.8 @@ -39,6 +39,18 @@ This utility\*(Aqs behavior is similar to are support for socket activation with "Accept=no" and an event\-driven design that scales better with the number of connections\&. +.PP +Note that +\fBsystemd\-socket\-proxyd\fR +will not forward socket side channel information, i\&.e\&. will not forward +\fBSCM_RIGHTS\fR, +\fBSCM_CREDENTIALS\fR, +\fBSCM_SECURITY\fR, +\fBSO_PEERCRED\fR, +\fBSO_PEERPIDFD\fR, +\fBSO_PEERSEC\fR, +\fBSO_PEERGROUPS\fR +and similar\&. .SH "OPTIONS" .PP The following options are understood: diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-soft-reboot.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-soft-reboot.service.8 index e7e7c776..6aa6122f 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-soft-reboot.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-soft-reboot.service.8 @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ via \fISurviveFinalKillSignal=yes\fR, and also be configured to avoid being stopped on isolate via \fIIgnoreOnIsolate=yes\fR\&. They also have to be configured to be stopped on normal shutdown, reboot and maintenance mode\&. Finally, they have to be ordered after \fBbasic\&.target\fR -to ensure correct ordeering on boot\&. Note that in case any new or custom units are used to isolate to, or that implement an equivalent shutdown functionality, they will also have to be configured manually for correct ordering and conflicting\&. For example: +to ensure correct ordering on boot\&. Note that in case any new or custom units are used to isolate to, or that implement an equivalent shutdown functionality, they will also have to be configured manually for correct ordering and conflicting\&. For example: .sp .if n \{\ .RS 4 diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-storagetm.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-storagetm.service.8 index 2f67cdb1..562730c7 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-storagetm.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-storagetm.service.8 @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The following options are understood: \fB\-\-nqn=\fR .RS 4 Takes a string\&. If specified configures the NVMe Qualified Name to use for the exposed NVMe\-TCP mass storage devices\&. The NQN should follow the syntax described in -\m[blue]\fBNVM Express Base Specification 2\&.0c\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2, section 4\&.5 "NVMe Qualified Names"\&. Note that the NQN specified here will be suffixed with a dot and the the block device name before it is exposed on the NVMe target\&. If not specified defaults to +\m[blue]\fBNVM Express Base Specification 2\&.0c\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[1]\d\s+2, section 4\&.5 "NVMe Qualified Names"\&. Note that the NQN specified here will be suffixed with a dot and the block device name before it is exposed on the NVMe target\&. If not specified defaults to "nqn\&.2023\-10\&.io\&.systemd:storagetm\&.\fIID\fR", where ID is replaced by a 128bit ID derived from \fBmachine-id\fR(5)\&. .sp diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-sysext.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-sysext.8 index 949afe88..8d83408c 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-sysext.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-sysext.8 @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ but the used architecture identifiers are the same as for described in \fBsystemd.unit\fR(5)\&. \fIEXTENSION_RELOAD_MANAGER=\fR -can be set to 1 if the extension requires a service manager reload after application of the extension\&. Note that the for the reasons mentioned earlier: +can be set to 1 if the extension requires a service manager reload after application of the extension\&. Note that for the reasons mentioned earlier: \m[blue]\fBPortable Services\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[2]\d\s+2 remain the recommended way to ship system services\&. System extensions should not ship a /usr/lib/os\-release diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-timedated.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-timedated.service.8 index a221cf9e..20bfcc8e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-timedated.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-timedated.service.8 @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ and for information about the D\-Bus API\&. .SH "LIST OF NETWORK TIME SYNCHRONIZATION SERVICES" .PP -\fBsystemd\-timesyncd\fR +\fBsystemd\-timedated\fR will look for files with a "\&.list" extension in @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ systemd\-timesyncd\&.service If the environment variable \fI$SYSTEMD_TIMEDATED_NTP_SERVICES\fR is set, -\fBsystemd\-timesyncd\fR +\fBsystemd\-timedated\fR will parse the contents of that variable as a colon\-separated list of unit names\&. When set, this variable overrides the file\-based list described above\&. .PP \fBExample\ \&2.\ \&An override that specifies that chronyd should be used if available\fR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 index cc6228af..6e6407bc 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 @@ -415,6 +415,12 @@ will be ignored by the executable, and needs to be handled by the pager\&. This option instructs the pager to not send termcap initialization and deinitialization strings to the terminal\&. It is set by default to allow command output to remain visible in the terminal even after the pager exits\&. Nevertheless, this prevents some pager functionality from working, in particular paged output cannot be scrolled with the mouse\&. .RE .sp +Note that setting the regular +\fI$LESS\fR +environment variable has no effect for +\fBless\fR +invocations by systemd tools\&. +.sp See \fBless\fR(1) for more discussion\&. @@ -426,6 +432,12 @@ Override the charset passed to \fBless\fR (by default "utf\-8", if the invoking terminal is determined to be UTF\-8 compatible)\&. +.sp +Note that setting the regular +\fI$LESSCHARSET\fR +environment variable has no effect for +\fBless\fR +invocations by systemd tools\&. .RE .PP \fI$SYSTEMD_PAGERSECURE\fR diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tpm2-setup.service.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tpm2-setup.service.8 index bccb5479..2b155a66 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tpm2-setup.service.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/systemd-tpm2-setup.service.8 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ are services that generate the Storage Root Key (SRK) if it hasn\*(Aqt been gene The services will store the public key of the SRK key pair in a PEM file in /run/systemd/tpm2\-srk\-public\-key\&.pem and -/var/lib/systemd/tpm2\-srk\-public\-key\&.pem\&. It will also store it in TPM2B_PUBLIC format in +/var/lib/systemd/tpm2\-srk\-public\-key\&.pem\&. They will also store it in TPM2B_PUBLIC format in /run/systemd/tpm2\-srk\-public\-key\&.tpm2_public and /var/lib/systemd/tpm2\-srk\-public\-key\&.tpm2b_public\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-bfifo.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-bfifo.8 index 3e290322..bc05ef4d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-bfifo.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-bfifo.8 @@ -37,8 +37,6 @@ If the list is too long, no further packets are allowed on. This is called 'tail limit Maximum queue size. Specified in bytes for bfifo, in packets for pfifo. For pfifo, defaults to the interface txqueuelen, as specified with -.BR ifconfig (8) -or .BR ip (8). The range for this parameter is [0, UINT32_MAX]. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-gact.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-gact.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81aa30eb --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-gact.8 @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +.TH "Generic actions in tc" 8 "11 Jan 2023" "iproute2" "Linux" + +.SH NAME +gact - generic action +.SH SYNOPSIS +.in +8 +.ti -8 +.BR tc " ... " "action gact" +.IR CONTROL " [ " RAND " ] [ " INDEX " ]" +.ti -8 +.IR CONTROL " := { " +.BR reclassify " | " drop " | " continue " | " pass " | " pipe " | " +.br +.BI "goto chain " "CHAIN_INDEX" +| +.br +.BI "jump " "JUMP_COUNT" +} + +.ti -8 +.IR RAND " := " +.BI random " RANDTYPE CONTROL VAL" +.ti -8 +.IR RANDTYPE " := { " +.BR netrand " | " determ " }" +.ti -8 +.IR VAL " := number not exceeding 10000" +.ti -8 +.IR JUMP_COUNT " := absolute jump from start of action list" +.ti -8 +.IR INDEX " := index value used" + +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B gact +action allows reclassify, dropping, passing, or accepting packets. +At the moment there are only two algorithms. One is deterministic +and the other uses internal kernel netrand. + +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.BI random " RANDTYPE CONTROL VAL" +The probability of taking the action expressed in terms of 1 out of +.I VAL +packets. + +.TP +.I CONTROL +Indicate how +.B tc +should proceed if the packet matches. +For a description of the possible +.I CONTROL +values, see +.BR tc-actions (8). + +.SH EXAMPLES +Apply a rule on ingress to drop packets from a given source address. +.RS +.EX +# tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: protocol ip prio 6 u32 match ip src \ +10.0.0.9/32 flowid 1:16 action drop +.EE +.RE + +Allow 1 out 10 packets from source randomly using the netrand generator +.RS +.EX +# tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: protocol ip prio 6 u32 match ip src \ +10.0.0.9/32 flowid 1:16 action drop random netrand ok 10 +.EE +.RE + +Deterministically accept every second packet +.RS +.EX +# tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: protocol ip prio 6 u32 match ip src \ +10.0.0.9/32 flowid 1:16 action drop random determ ok 2 +.EE +.RE + +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR tc (8), +.BR tc-actions (8), +.BR tc-u32 (8) diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-htb.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-htb.8 index 7aa62615..59b159fb 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-htb.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-htb.8 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ bytes .SH DESCRIPTION HTB allows control of the outbound bandwidth on a given link. -It allows simulating simulating several slower links and to send different +It allows simulating several slower links and to send different kinds of traffic on different simulated links. In both cases, you have to specify how to divide the physical link into simulated links and how to decide which simulated link to use for a given packet to be sent. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-matchall.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-matchall.8 index d0224066..538cf745 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-matchall.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-matchall.8 @@ -37,39 +37,39 @@ To create ingress mirroring from port eth1 to port eth2: .RS .EX -tc qdisc add dev eth1 handle ffff: ingress -tc filter add dev eth1 parent ffff: \\ +tc qdisc add dev eth1 handle ffff: clsact +tc filter add dev eth1 ingress \\ matchall skip_sw \\ action mirred egress mirror \\ dev eth2 .EE .RE -The first command creates an ingress qdisc with handle +The first command creates a clsact qdisc with handle .BR ffff: on device .BR eth1 where the second command attaches a matchall filters on it that mirrors the -packets to device eth2. +packets to device eth2 for ingress. To create egress mirroring from port eth1 to port eth2: .RS .EX -tc qdisc add dev eth1 handle 1: root prio -tc filter add dev eth1 parent 1: \\ +tc qdisc add dev eth1 handle ffff: clsact +tc filter add dev eth1 egress \\ matchall skip_sw \\ action mirred egress mirror \\ dev eth2 .EE .RE -The first command creates an egress qdisc with handle -.BR 1: -that replaces the root qdisc on device +The first command creates a clsact qdisc with handle +.BR ffff: +on device .BR eth1 where the second command attaches a matchall filters on it that mirrors the -packets to device eth2. +packets to device eth2 for egress. To sample one of every 100 packets flowing into interface eth0 to psample group 12: diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-mirred.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-mirred.8 index 38833b45..6959e3e6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-mirred.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-mirred.8 @@ -9,13 +9,24 @@ mirred - mirror/redirect action .I DIRECTION ACTION .RB "[ " index .IR INDEX " ] " -.BI dev " DEVICENAME" +.I TARGET .ti -8 .IR DIRECTION " := { " .BR ingress " | " egress " }" .ti -8 +.IR TARGET " := { " DEV " | " BLOCK " }" + +.ti -8 +.IR DEV " := " +.BI dev " DEVICENAME" + +.ti -8 +.IR BLOCK " := " +.BI blockid " BLOCKID" + +.ti -8 .IR ACTION " := { " .BR mirror " | " redirect " }" .SH DESCRIPTION @@ -24,6 +35,12 @@ The action allows packet mirroring (copying) or redirecting (stealing) the packet it receives. Mirroring is what is sometimes referred to as Switch Port Analyzer (SPAN) and is commonly used to analyze and/or debug flows. +When mirroring to a tc block, the packet will be mirrored to all the ports in +the block with exception of the port where the packet ingressed, if that port is +part of the tc block. Redirecting is similar to mirroring except that the +behaviour is to mirror to the first N - 1 ports in the block and redirect to the +last one (note that the port in which the packet arrived is not going to be +mirrored or redirected to). .SH OPTIONS .TP .B ingress @@ -39,7 +56,7 @@ Define whether the packet should be copied .RB ( mirror ) or moved .RB ( redirect ) -to the destination interface. +to the destination interface or block. .TP .BI index " INDEX" Assign a unique ID to this action instead of letting the kernel choose one @@ -49,14 +66,17 @@ is a 32bit unsigned integer greater than zero. .TP .BI dev " DEVICENAME" Specify the network interface to redirect or mirror to. +.TP +.BI blockid " BLOCKID" +Specify the tc block to redirect or mirror to. .SH EXAMPLES Limit ingress bandwidth on eth0 to 1mbit/s, redirect exceeding traffic to lo for debugging purposes: .RS .EX -# tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle ffff: ingress -# tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: u32 \\ +# tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle ffff: clsact +# tc filter add dev eth0 ingress u32 \\ match u32 0 0 \\ action police rate 1mbit burst 100k conform-exceed pipe \\ action mirred egress redirect dev lo @@ -70,8 +90,8 @@ with e.g. tcpdump: .EX # ip link add dummy0 type dummy # ip link set dummy0 up -# tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle ffff: ingress -# tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: protocol ip \\ +# tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle ffff: clsact +# tc filter add dev eth0 ingress protocol ip \\ u32 match ip protocol 1 0xff \\ action mirred egress mirror dev dummy0 .EE @@ -87,13 +107,21 @@ interface, it is possible to send ingress traffic through an instance of # modprobe ifb # ip link set ifb0 up # tc qdisc add dev ifb0 root sfq -# tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle ffff: ingress -# tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: u32 \\ +# tc qdisc add dev eth0 handle ffff: clsact +# tc filter add dev eth0 ingress u32 \\ match u32 0 0 \\ action mirred egress redirect dev ifb0 .EE .RE +.SH LIMITATIONS +The kernel restricts nesting to four levels to avoid the chance +of nesting loops. +.PP +Do not redirect for one IFB device to another. +IFB is a very specialized case of packet redirecting device. +Redirecting from ifbX->ifbY will cause all packets to be dropped. + .SH SEE ALSO .BR tc (8), .BR tc-u32 (8) diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-pfifo_fast.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-pfifo_fast.8 index baf34b1d..0029d67f 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-pfifo_fast.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-pfifo_fast.8 @@ -27,8 +27,6 @@ have traffic, higher bands are never dequeued. This can be used to prioritize interactive traffic or penalize 'lowest cost' traffic. Each band can be txqueuelen packets long, as configured with -.BR ifconfig (8) -or .BR ip (8). Additional packets coming in are not enqueued but are instead dropped. @@ -40,8 +38,6 @@ for complete details on how TOS bits are translated into bands. txqueuelen The length of the three bands depends on the interface txqueuelen, as specified with -.BR ifconfig (8) -or .BR ip (8). .SH BUGS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-sfb.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-sfb.8 index e4584deb..1f2b8c5e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-sfb.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-sfb.8 @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ the number of non-responsive flows, M. It is (1 - (1 - (1 / 16.0)) ** M) **8, so for example with 10 non-responsive flows approximately 0.2% of responsive flows will be misidentified. -To mitigate this, SFB performs performs periodic re-hashing to avoid +To mitigate this, SFB performs periodic re-hashing to avoid misclassification for prolonged periods of time. The default hashing method will use source and destination ip addresses and port numbers diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-simple.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-simple.8 index f565755e..ae1aec31 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-simple.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-simple.8 @@ -55,11 +55,11 @@ grep the logs to see the logged message display stats again and observe increment by 1 .EX - hadi@noma1:$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 ingress - hadi@noma1:$tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: protocol ip prio 5 \\ + $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 ingress + $ tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: protocol ip prio 5 \\ u32 match ip protocol 1 0xff flowid 1:1 action simple sdata "Incoming ICMP" - hadi@noma1:$ sudo tc -s filter ls dev eth0 parent ffff: + $ sudo tc -s filter ls dev eth0 parent ffff: filter protocol ip pref 5 u32 filter protocol ip pref 5 u32 fh 800: ht divisor 1 filter protocol ip pref 5 u32 fh 800::800 order 2048 key ht 800 bkt 0 flowid 1:1 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ display stats again and observe increment by 1 backlog 0b 0p requeues 0 - hadi@noma1$ ping -c 1 www.google.ca + $ ping -c 1 www.google.ca PING www.google.ca (74.125.225.120) 56(84) bytes of data. 64 bytes from ord08s08-in-f24.1e100.net (74.125.225.120): icmp_req=1 ttl=53 time=31.3 ms @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ display stats again and observe increment by 1 1 packets transmitted, 1 received, 0% packet loss, time 0ms rtt min/avg/max/mdev = 31.316/31.316/31.316/0.000 ms - hadi@noma1$ dmesg | grep simple + $ dmesg | grep simple [135354.473951] simple: Incoming ICMP_1 - hadi@noma1$ sudo tc/tc -s filter ls dev eth0 parent ffff: + $ sudo tc/tc -s filter ls dev eth0 parent ffff: filter protocol ip pref 5 u32 filter protocol ip pref 5 u32 fh 800: ht divisor 1 filter protocol ip pref 5 u32 fh 800::800 order 2048 key ht 800 bkt 0 flowid 1:1 diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-xt.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-xt.8 deleted file mode 100644 index f6dc5add..00000000 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc-xt.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.TH "iptables action in tc" 8 "3 Mar 2016" "iproute2" "Linux" - -.SH NAME -xt - tc iptables action -.SH SYNOPSIS -.in +8 -.ti -8 -.BR tc " ... " "action xt \-j" -.IR TARGET " [ " TARGET_OPTS " ]" -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B xt -action allows one to call arbitrary iptables targets for packets matching the filter -this action is attached to. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI -j " TARGET \fR[\fI TARGET_OPTS \fR]" -Perform a jump to the given iptables target, optionally passing any target -specific options in -.IR TARGET_OPTS . -.SH EXAMPLES -The following will attach a -.B u32 -filter to the -.B ingress -qdisc matching ICMP replies and using the -.B xt -action to make the kernel yell 'PONG' each time: - -.RS -.EX -tc qdisc add dev eth0 ingress -tc filter add dev eth0 parent ffff: proto ip u32 \\ - match ip protocol 1 0xff \\ - match ip icmp_type 0 0xff \\ - action xt -j LOG --log-prefix PONG -.EE -.RE -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR tc (8), -.BR tc-u32 (8), -.BR iptables-extensions (8) diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc.8 index e5bef911..dce58af1 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tc.8 @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ tc \- show / manipulate traffic control settings \fB[ \fB-nm \fR| \fB-nam\fR[\fIes\fR] \fB] \fR| \fB[ \fR{ \fB-cf \fR| \fB-c\fR[\fIonf\fR] \fR} \fB[ filename ] \fB] \fR \fB[ -t\fR[imestamp\fR] \fB\] \fR| \fB[ -t\fR[short\fR] \fR| \fB[ --o\fR[neline\fR] \fB]\fR } +-o\fR[neline\fR] \fB] \fR| \fB[ -echo ]\fR } .ti 8 .IR FORMAT " := {" @@ -743,6 +743,10 @@ When\fB\ tc monitor\fR\ runs, print timestamp before the event message in format When\fB\ tc monitor\fR\ runs, prints short timestamp before the event message in format: [<YYYY>-<MM>-<DD>T<hh:mm:ss>.<ms>] +.TP +.BR "\-echo" +Request the kernel to send the applied configuration back. + .SH FORMAT The show command has additional formatting options: @@ -871,6 +875,7 @@ was written by Alexey N. Kuznetsov and added in Linux 2.2. .BR tc-fq_codel (8), .BR tc-fq_pie (8), .BR tc-fw (8), +.BR tc-gact (8), .BR tc-hfsc (7), .BR tc-hfsc (8), .BR tc-htb (8), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/testpkg.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/testpkg.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31917799 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/testpkg.8 @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +'\" t +.\" Title: testpkg +.\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] +.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 +.\" Manual: Pacman Manual +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 +.\" Language: English +.\" +.TH "TESTPKG" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" * Define some portability stuff +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673 +.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html +.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq +.el .ds Aq ' +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" * set default formatting +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" disable hyphenation +.nh +.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only) +.ad l +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE * +.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- +.SH "NAME" +testpkg \- test a pacman package for validity +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.sp +\fItestpkg\fR <package file> +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.sp +\fItestpkg\fR is a script used to make sure that a pacman package is valid\&. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.sp +\fBpacman\fR(8) +.sp +See the pacman website at https://archlinux\&.org/pacman/ for current information on pacman and its related tools\&. +.SH "BUGS" +.sp +Bugs? You must be kidding; there are no bugs in this software\&. But if we happen to be wrong, submit a bug report with as much detail as possible at the Arch Linux Bug Tracker in the Pacman section\&. +.SH "AUTHORS" +.sp +Current maintainers: +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Allan McRae <allan@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +Past major contributors: +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Judd Vinet <jvinet@zeroflux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Aurelien Foret <aurelien@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Aaron Griffin <aaron@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Dan McGee <dan@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Xavier Chantry <shiningxc@gmail\&.com> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp +For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tipc-nametable.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tipc-nametable.8 index b187d25e..f7c51f19 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tipc-nametable.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tipc-nametable.8 @@ -49,13 +49,13 @@ provided by a port. .B Lower .br The lower bound of the 32-bit instance field of the port name. -The instance field is often used as as a sub-class indicator. +The instance field is often used as a sub-class indicator. .TP .B Upper .br The upper bound of the 32-bit instance field of the port name. -The instance field is often used as as a sub-class indicator. +The instance field is often used as a sub-class indicator. A difference in .BR "lower " "and " upper means the socket is bound to the port name range [lower,upper] diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tune2fs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tune2fs.8 index 4b9d77af..22295264 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/tune2fs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/tune2fs.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\" Initial revision .\" .\" -.TH TUNE2FS 8 "February 2023" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.0" +.TH TUNE2FS 8 "May 2024" "E2fsprogs version 1.47.1" .SH NAME tune2fs \- adjust tunable file system parameters on ext2/ext3/ext4 file systems .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/update-pciids.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/update-pciids.8 index ca01c279..b48fdabf 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/update-pciids.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/update-pciids.8 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH update-pciids 8 "25 February 2024" "pciutils-3.11.1" "The PCI Utilities" +.TH update-pciids 8 "05 April 2024" "pciutils-3.12.0" "The PCI Utilities" .SH NAME update-pciids \- download new version of the PCI ID list diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/updpkgsums.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/updpkgsums.8 index 10286d30..8e492b07 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/updpkgsums.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/updpkgsums.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: updpkgsums .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-01-29 +.\" Date: 2024-05-10 .\" Manual: Pacman-contrib Manual -.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.4 +.\" Source: Pacman-contrib 1.10.6 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "UPDPKGSUMS" "8" "2024\-01\-29" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.4" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" +.TH "UPDPKGSUMS" "8" "2024\-05\-10" "Pacman\-contrib 1\&.10\&.6" "Pacman\-contrib Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vercmp.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vercmp.8 index ece8b9a4..4c2e7dff 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vercmp.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vercmp.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vercmp .\" Author: [see the "Authors" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 2024-02-06 +.\" Date: 2024-03-15 .\" Manual: Pacman Manual -.\" Source: Pacman 6.0.2 +.\" Source: Pacman 6.1.0 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VERCMP" "8" "2024\-02\-06" "Pacman 6\&.0\&.2" "Pacman Manual" +.TH "VERCMP" "8" "2024\-03\-15" "Pacman 6\&.1\&.0" "Pacman Manual" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -191,17 +191,6 @@ Andrew Gregory <andrew\&.gregory\&.8@gmail\&.com> .sp -1 .IP \(bu 2.3 .\} -Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -.sp -1 -.IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} Morgan Adamiec <morganamilo@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp @@ -284,4 +273,15 @@ Nagy Gabor <ngaba@bibl\&.u\-szeged\&.hu> Dave Reisner <dreisner@archlinux\&.org> .RE .sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +Eli Schwartz <eschwartz@archlinux\&.org> +.RE +.sp For additional contributors, use git shortlog \-s on the pacman\&.git repository\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 index 50057234..11d3e711 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_acl_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 index 23222b88..f0d259e1 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_acl_xattr .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 index 313d6dad..49281bdc 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_aio_fork .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AIO_FORK" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AIO_FORK" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Straight forward use: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 index 721bd46e..ee501ad5 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_aio_pthread .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AIO_PTHREAD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AIO_PTHREAD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ The default is \*(Aqno\*(Aq\&. .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_audit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_audit.8 index 7dc30c34..f92caeab 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Log operations on all shares using the LOCAL1 facility and NOTICE priority: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 index 41880807..61cecb61 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_btrfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_BTRFS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_BTRFS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ to Windows Explorer as file / directory "previous versions"\&. .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_cap.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_cap.8 index 47e6fc6e..fb6335b9 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_cap.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_cap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_cap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ On a system using GNU libiconv, use CAP encoding to support users in the Shift_J .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_catia.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_catia.8 index eabcfddd..a6684c65 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_catia.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_catia.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_catia .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_commit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_commit.8 index c5ab7ace..5cb55751 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_commit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_commit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_commit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ commit may reduce performance\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 index eaba6b04..4a1acf0b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_crossrename .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CROSSRENAME" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CROSSRENAME" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ To add server\-side cross\-device renames inside of a share for all files sized .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 index d044cbf0..a1350f9a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_default_quota .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Store the default quota record in the quota record for the user with ID 65535 an .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 index 0a49e1ed..8d332a0e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_dirsort .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Sort directories for all shares: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 index 6790c5e5..e06e7467 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_expand_msdfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_EXPAND_MSDFS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_EXPAND_MSDFS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ With this module, the link target is not directly a server and share, but this m With this, clients from network 192\&.168\&.234/24 are redirected to host local\&.samba\&.org, clients from 192\&.168/16 are redirected to remote\&.samba\&.org and all other clients go to default\&.samba\&.org\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 index 46b26ded..17ce984d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_extd_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ is identical to This module is stackable\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 index 3874896c..96fdf112 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fake_perms .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This module is stackable\&. .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fileid.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fileid.8 index be500cb0..67ed573a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fileid.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fileid.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fileid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ fileid:nolock_max_slots = NUMBER(1\-18446744073709551615) .RS 4 This option alters the behavior of the nolock -algorithm in a ways that it also breaks the lock coherency between individual processes on the same host\&. The default is to have just 1 concurrent slot available per host\&. By incressing the number of slots you can specify how many concurrent processes can work on a given inode without contention, the number should typically be larger than the a number of logical cpus, maybe 2 times of num_cpus\&. +algorithm in a way that it also breaks the lock coherency between individual processes on the same host\&. The default is to have just 1 concurrent slot available per host\&. By increasing the number of slots you can specify how many concurrent processes can work on a given inode without contention, the number should typically be larger than the number of logical cpus, maybe 2 times num_cpus\&. .RE .PP fileid:nolock_all_dirs = BOOL @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ module in order avoid load on heavily contended (most likely read\-only) inodes\ .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fruit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fruit.8 index 097d1579..de13750b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fruit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_fruit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fruit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FRUIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FRUIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ fruit:resource = [ file | xattr | stream ] .RS 4 Controls where the OS X resource fork is stored\&. .sp -Due to a spelling bug in all Samba versions older then 4\&.6\&.0, this option can also be given as +Due to a spelling bug in all Samba versions older than 4\&.6\&.0, this option can also be given as \fIfruit:ressource\fR, ie with two s\&. .sp Settings: @@ -515,6 +515,15 @@ Whether an attempt shall be made to convert \&._ AppleDouble sidecar files to na The default is \fIyes\fR\&. .RE +.PP +fruit:validate_afpinfo = yes | no +.RS 4 +Apple clients use the AFP_AfpInfo stream to store structured file metadata\&. As part of the marshaled data stored in the stream the first eight bytes contain some header information\&. Apple\*(Aqs SMB server as well as Samba will validate this header bytes processing a client write request on this stream, and, if the validation fails, fail the write\&. While this validation is generally correct, in some data migration scenarios clients may try to migrate data from 3rd\-party SMB servers to Samba servers where the header information is broken for whatever reason\&. To allow migration and header fix\-up in these scenarios, the validation can be temporarily disabled by setting this option to +\fIno\fR\&. +.sp +The default is +\fIyes\fR\&. +.RE .SH "EXAMPLES" .sp .if n \{\ diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 index daeb52cb..fc30d437 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_full_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Log file and directory open operations on the [records] share using the LOCAL7 f .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs.8 index c8a75874..1fe319d7 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_glusterfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ on the commandline\&. With GlusterFS versions >= 9, we silently bypass write\-behind translator during initial connect and failure is avoided\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 index a0ce8ecf..c9d5efbd 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_glusterfs_fuse .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS_FUSE" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS_FUSE" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ module\&. This module does currently have no further options\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_gpfs.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_gpfs.8 index 99709479..8b9bf791 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_gpfs.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_gpfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_gpfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_GPFS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_GPFS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ gpfs\&.h in gpfs versions newer than 3\&.2\&.1 PTF8\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 index 9d07a064..52686e35 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_io_uring .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_IO_URING" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_IO_URING" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ The default is \*(Aqno\*(Aq\&. \fBio_uring_setup\fR(2)\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 index 8d1e5b12..a24f1af0 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_linux_xfs_sgid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_LINUX_XFS_SGID" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_LINUX_XFS_SGID" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Add linux_xfs_sgid functionality for [share]: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 index f0c93201..6c2ffae6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_media_harmony .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_MEDIA_HARMONY" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_MEDIA_HARMONY" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ vfs_media_harmony is designed to work with Avid editing applications that look in the Avid MediaFiles or OMFI MediaFiles directories for media\&. It is not designed to work as expected in all circumstances for general use\&. For example: It is possible to open a client\-specific file such as msmMMOB\&.mdb_192\&.168\&.1\&.10_userx even though it doesn\*(Aqt show up in a directory listing\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_offline.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_offline.8 index d04e7c99..265c0f53 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_offline.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_offline.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_offline .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_OFFLINE" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_OFFLINE" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Mark all files in a share as offline: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_preopen.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_preopen.8 index a03aa753..111d58b6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_preopen.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_preopen.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_preopen .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ in the \*(Aq\m[blue]\fBlog level\fR\m[]\*(Aq section for special handling of the .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readahead.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readahead.8 index ac00db1f..dd967f27 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readahead.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readahead.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_readahead .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ G .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readonly.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readonly.8 index 8e2d0fc7..0c7633ae 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readonly.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_readonly.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_readonly .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Mark the [backup] share as read only during business hours: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_recycle.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_recycle.8 index 003fcb86..4c2bc82a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_recycle.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_recycle.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_recycle .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ instead of deleting them: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 index 52b89ca2..ad9bc58c 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shadow_copy .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy relies on a filesystem snapshot implementation\&. Many common filesystems have native support for this\&. .PP Filesystem snapshots must be mounted on specially named directories in order to be recognized by -vfs_shadow_copy\&. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared\&. +vfs_shadow_copy\&. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of the directory being shared\&. .PP The snapshot naming convention is @GMT\-YYYY\&.MM\&.DD\-hh\&.mm\&.ss, where: .RS @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 index d659e254..028ad4c6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shadow_copy2 .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy2 is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 index 7706e053..5b8574b1 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shell_snap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHELL_SNAP" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHELL_SNAP" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Samba\*(Aqs FSRVP server must be configured in the [global] section: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_snapper.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_snapper.8 index 6584c4c0..51770c56 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_snapper.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_snapper.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_snapper .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SNAPPER" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SNAPPER" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Remote snapshot creation and deletion is only permitted by Samba for Active Dire The DiskShadow\&.exe FSRVP client initially authenticates as the Active Directory computer account\&. This account must therefore be granted the same permissions as the user account issuing the snapshot creation and deletion requests\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 index c4016527..b381561a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_streams_depot .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 index 9c52a08e..aa718a42 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_streams_xattr .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_syncops.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_syncops.8 index af9959a8..14573a3b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_syncops.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_syncops.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_syncops .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Add syncops functionality for [share]: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 index 8cfc3fe1..7881ef9a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_time_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_TIME_AUDIT" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_TIME_AUDIT" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This would log VFS calls that take longer than 3 seconds: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 index a3cf3978..c8a30f34 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_unityed_media .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_UNITYED_MEDIA" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_UNITYED_MEDIA" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Enable unityed_media for Mac and Windows clients: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 index 001a8a5c..558236ae 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_virusfilter .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools .\" Source: Samba 4.8 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_VIRUSFILTER" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.8" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_VIRUSFILTER" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.8" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -100,7 +100,8 @@ Path of local socket for the virus scanner\&. If this option is not set, the default path depends on the configured AV scanning engine\&. .sp For the -\fIsophos\fRbackend the default is +\fIsophos\fR +backend the default is \fI/var/run/savdi/sssp\&.sock\fR\&. .sp For the diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 index a3cc9072..86be831d 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_widelinks .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_WIDELINKS" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_WIDELINKS" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This module is stackable\&. No examples listed\&. This module is implicitly loaded by smbd as needed\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_worm.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_worm.8 index 059854f1..c07fc5b6 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_worm.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_worm.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_worm .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_WORM" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_WORM" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Deny the write access to files and folders, which are older than five minutes (3 .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 index d3da0502..40ee334b 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_xattr_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbind_krb5_locator.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbind_krb5_locator.8 index 88cd5701..4344d60a 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbind_krb5_locator.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbind_krb5_locator.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: winbind_krb5_locator .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: 8 -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "WINBIND_KRB5_LOCATOR" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "8" +.TH "WINBIND_KRB5_LOCATOR" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "8" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ After copying the locator plugin to the appropriate plugin directory it should i /etc/krb5\&.conf\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbindd.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbindd.8 index f6f37630..a4a67dad 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbindd.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/winbindd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: winbindd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 02/19/2024 +.\" Date: 05/09/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5 +.\" Source: Samba 4.20.1 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "WINBINDD" "8" "02/19/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5" "System Administration tools" +.TH "WINBINDD" "8" "05/09/2024" "Samba 4\&.20\&.1" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ Storage for cached user and group information\&. .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.20\&.1 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP nsswitch\&.conf(5), diff --git a/upstream/archlinux/man8/xfs_db.8 b/upstream/archlinux/man8/xfs_db.8 index f53ddd67..a7f6d55e 100644 --- a/upstream/archlinux/man8/xfs_db.8 +++ b/upstream/archlinux/man8/xfs_db.8 @@ -388,6 +388,29 @@ and options are used to select the attribute or data area of the inode, if neither option is given then both areas are shown. .TP +.BI "bmapinflate [\-d " dirty_bytes "] [-e] [\-n " nr "] +Duplicates the first data fork mapping this many times, as if the mapping had +been repeatedly reflinked. +This is an expert-mode command for exercising high-refcount filesystems only. +Existing data fork mappings will be forgotten and the refcount btree will not +be updated. +This command leaves at least the refcount btree and the inode inconsistent; +.B xfs_repair +must be run afterwards. +.RS 1.0i +.TP 0.4i +.B \-d +Constrain the memory consumption of new dirty btree blocks to this quantity. +Defaults to 60MiB. +.TP 0.4i +.B \-e +Estimate the number of blocks and height of the new data fork mapping +structure and exit without changing anything. +.TP 0.4i +.B \-n +Create this many copies of the first mapping. +.RE +.TP .B btdump [-a] [-i] If the cursor points to a btree node, dump the btree from that block downward. If instead the cursor points to an inode, dump the data fork block mapping btree if there is one. |